JP7013357B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a gaming machine, there is one in which the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol are executed at the same time (Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a device that displays the remaining number of variable displays until the end of the special state during the high-accuracy high-base state as the special state (Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-159941 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-159981

However, when the gaming machine of Patent Document 2 is applied to the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 described above, when the remaining number of times is displayed at the start of the special state, the first variable display and the second variable display are simultaneously displayed at the start of the special state. If it can be executed, the remaining number of times may be reduced by two times, which may cause a sense of discomfort.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is a gaming machine capable of appropriately displaying the remaining number of times in a gaming machine in which a first variable display and a second variable display are executed at the same time. To provide an opportunity.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
The first variable display means for performing the first variable display and deriving and displaying the display result,
A second variable display means that performs a second variable display and derives and displays the display result,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling the special state until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed,
In the special state, a remaining number display control means capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends, and
A first holding storage means for storing information related to the first variable display that has not been started as the first holding storage information is provided.
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time.
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display.
The remaining number display control means
The predetermined number of times is displayed before the start of the special state, the remaining number of times is not displayed when the special state is started, and the remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the special state. At the same time, the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.
The remaining number of times is displayed when the variable display after the lapse of the predetermined period is started, the display of the remaining number of times is temporarily erased during the execution of the variable display, and the remaining number of times is displayed again after the variable display is completed. And display
In both the first variable display and the second variable display, the display of the remaining number of times is updated.
The predetermined period is characterized in that it is a period longer than the total period of the execution period of the first variable display as the first reserved storage information stored in the first reserved storage means.
(1) In order to achieve the above objectives, other gaming machines
It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (for example, variable display of a special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a background symbol) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. hand,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started).
Moreover,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 57 (D) and 57 (F)).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed in the gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time .

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
Further, a first reserved storage means (for example, RAM 55, a first reserved storage buffer of FIG. 20) for storing information related to the first variable display that has not been started as the first reserved storage information is further provided.
The predetermined period is a period longer than the total period of the execution period of the first variable display as the first reserved storage information stored in the first reserved storage means (for example, the predetermined period is the first reserved period). It is longer than the total period of execution of the variable display as the first hold storage stored in the storage buffer).

According to such a configuration, the remaining number of times is displayed when a period longer than the total period of the execution period of the first variable display elapses, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort when updating the display of the remaining number of times. Can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above
The remaining number display control means displays the remaining number of times after all the first variable display as the first reserved storage information stored in the first reserved storage means is executed (for example, the first reserved storage). The remaining number of times is displayed after all the variable display as the first hold storage stored in the buffer is executed).

According to such a configuration, since the remaining number of times is displayed after all the first variable display is executed, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort when updating the display of the remaining number of times.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The remaining number display control means displays the remaining number of times at the start of the variable display after the lapse of the predetermined period, temporarily erases the display of the remaining number of times during the execution of the variable display, and ends the variable display. Occasionally, the remaining number of times is displayed again (for example, as shown in FIG. 48F, the second remaining number of times display 269F003 is displayed at the start of the 51st variable display after the lapse of 50 variable displays, and FIG. As shown in G), the remaining number of times display is erased during the variable display, and as shown in FIG. 48 (H), the second remaining number of times display 269F003 is displayed again when the 51st variable display is stopped).

According to such a configuration, since the first variable display is executed during the execution of the second variable display, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by updating the remaining number of times based on the first variable display.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following (5) to (12). Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that displays a title that informs the type of reach effect at the start of reach effect, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-101428. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to enhance the effect of production, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production.

(5) In order to achieve the above objectives, other gaming machines
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and
A title notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect is provided.
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 57 (D) and 57 (F)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect, and
In the plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the specific period may be made feasible in a common manner (for example, FIG. 57 (C)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) or (6) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a preview effect) suggesting that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the specific period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (5) to (7) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. It is possible and
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8) above
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (5) to (9) above,
The suggestion effect execution means may enable the suggestion effect to be executed in an effect mode related to the title notified in the specific period.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(11) In any of the gaming machines (5) to (10) above,
Detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, stick controller 9031A or push button 9031B), and
Further, a specific display executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) for performing a specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means is further provided.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. It is possible and
During the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 65 (E) and 66 (I)).
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, the operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 66 (J) and 66 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (5) to (11) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, the first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 67A). Etc.) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (second size reach title image 31AK062 or the like displayed at the time of reaching title production shown in FIG. 67 (d)) (for example, an image). A display device 905 and a production control CPU 90120) are further provided.
The display means is
Multiple types of elements having different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (fruit pattern, etc. shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (d)) configured including the above.
When either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display is displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Display so that elements E1 to E5 are included in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (d)).
According to such a configuration, a specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that a specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in a big hit state and a KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in a big hit state and a KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase production. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state. It is a figure which shows the production operation example in the feature part 269F. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation pattern and the type of reach. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the state where the frame for the gaming machine is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 150IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process which is executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial roll determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination process during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a puzzle production setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the puzzle production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the puzzle production mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect decision table, the accessory effect effect decision table, and the light guide plate effect decision table in a big hit. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the production operation example. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production mode of the puzzle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production mode of the puzzle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production mode of the puzzle production. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a game machine in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing of the frame for a gaming machine in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko gaming machine in the modification 3.

[About the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (bullet gaming machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a gaming frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding the board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. Further, a game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game ball can flow down is formed.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying a decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second start condition, which is a second execution condition, are satisfied. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won a prize in the second starting winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 9b) and a display area (hereinafter referred to as a background symbol display unit) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. It is called 9c). It should be noted that the fact that the display contents are easy to visually recognize means that, for example, the size of the display area is large, or the display contents in the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol display unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. The winning is that the game ball enters an area that is predetermined as a winning area such as a winning opening. Further, the derivation display of the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol display unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol display unit 9c has two variable displays. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp. In this embodiment, the background symbol is for displaying the symbol variation for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative pattern, and the effect symbol. ..

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying a number from 0 to 9, for example. Has been done. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to display variably. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers are 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers from 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is 0 to 5 numbers and non-numeric characters and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved storage (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighting indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative pattern are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be collectively referred to as a decorative pattern. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers from 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers from 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers from 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second holding storages. There is an area (hereinafter referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is displayed to the player on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color may be different or the display density may be different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes the effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second effective starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the actuated gate 17 is detected by the actuated gate switch 17a.

Below the actuating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display 10. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 is formed. The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged adjacent to each other, the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used for a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is located on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided in the special winning opening 24. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 are used. More prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters). Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the special winning opening 24 cannot pass (enter) the game ball to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 14, a second starting opening switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball is provided in the second starting winning opening 14. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches the game (so-called right side) during a big hit game or in the KT state described later. Hitting operation) is performed. Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, for example, the effect display device 9 displays "right-handed" or the like or moves to the right. It is desirable to notify that the player is in the right-handed operation period by displaying an arrow indicating.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying a number from 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a rectangular shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by 1. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by 1.

A decorative lamp 25 that blinks and is displayed during the game is provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer peripheral portion, the outer peripheral left portion, and the outer peripheral right portion of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 7 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the ball striking operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 9a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Is increased by 1.

Further, if the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the second decorative symbol is started on the second variable display unit 9b. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stop becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time has elapsed after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 16R probability variable jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming status is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the probability of the next big hit is higher than that of the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the first start winning, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting winning, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the probability of the next big hit is higher than that of the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the game shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state. In this embodiment, the small hit gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, although the advantage is lower than that of the big hit gaming state (in this example, the number of balls that can be obtained is small). The gaming state does not transition to another gaming state before and after the gaming state. In the small hit game state, 15 prize balls are paid out for each prize.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , An odd number of 0-9) is higher than in the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is in a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed on the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probabilistic state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is the occurrence of a jackpot than the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a fixed time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, since it is configured to be a small hit except when it is a big hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, except for the case of forced loss described later), the KT state is set to a smaller hit than the normal state. It is in a game state where it is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and then when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, but the embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. do not have. For example, it is configured to provide a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, if the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, and then when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variable jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the prize ball is made to be obtained, some players may actively play the game by right-handed in the normal state, and the original playability is impaired. From this, even if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs due to the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol by hitting right in the normal state, a penalty is imposed by making it only shift to the 1st KT state, so that in the normal state It is possible to suppress aggressive right-handed games.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time point and the end time point of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing a reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle right aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to the variable display of any one of them is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stopped symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not stopped yet when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, during reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background pattern) can be displayed, or the background of the background pattern display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the pattern and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing the special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right of the base plate portion 101.

The bottom member 23 tilts downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodating hole 102 tilts downward to the left along the tilt of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom surface member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) for moving forward and backward is arranged.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and forward movement is performed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end portion (right end portion) of the bottom surface member 23 in the state of being in the state of being connected to the bottom surface member 23 in the longitudinal direction, and the upstream side flow path portion 113 forming a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 23. The downstream region 23L, which is the lower end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 23, and the downstream side flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 23 and forms the flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the end portion of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below to guide the game ball that has fallen below the bottom member 23 to the special winning opening 24.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball backward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow path portions bounces toward the glass door frame 2. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed as a separate body.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls connected in the left-right direction, consisting of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 to reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is determined when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be lined up at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension so that a game ball can pass between adjacent objects. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 similarly configured) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P will meander on the flow path F and flow down. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, flow down the guide flow path portion 115, and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and game control controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as a jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in an internal or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice or a sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the voice in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in time series.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the voice output board 70. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including a decorative pattern and a background pattern). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may be simply passed on another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) determines whether the content of the program is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the CTC (counter / timer) and the PIO (parallel input / output port), which are the built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. It is a mode indicating.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not in the ON state, check whether the data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, the processing when the power supply is stopped such as the addition of parity data) is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialization data for areas that may be initialized in the work area are set in the backup setting table. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and the control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). It should be noted that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). A game control process that controls the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc. is one round (random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.). Stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), the initial value is set in the counter.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power cutoff signal is output, for example, when the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a, and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control to output a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for big hit determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24, S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Determine whether to use the type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variable jackpot, or 16R probability variable jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)
In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a hold storage process (step S27a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, for example, when the CPU 56 inputs a detection signal from the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, the CPU 56 issues a payout control command for specifying one prize ball for payout control. Output to the microphone computer. Further, for example, when the CPU 56 inputs the detection signal from the first count switch 23a or the second count switch 25a, the CPU 56 outputs a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls to the payout control microphone computer. do.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening 24 and is detected by the second count switch 25a, the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect, which will be described later, are not immediately executed and are executed later. However, regarding the payout of prize balls, when the detection signal from the second count switch 25a is input in the prize ball processing in step S30, the payout control for immediately designating the number of prize balls is 15. A command is output, the payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97, and 15 prize balls are immediately paid out.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 sets the content related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is performed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 performs the variable display. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot determination table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change used in probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Numerical values are set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10A is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S162B) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, resulting in a small hit. As described above, in the KT state, since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit gaming state is higher than that in the big hit gaming state.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 10 (A). If any of the jackpot judgment values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for big hit determination matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10B, it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 10B indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is used. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but whether to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 8b a small hit symbol. It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. If it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 10B is performed, and the lottery process is performed to be approximately 1/4. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the second KT state. See steps S2207A, S2208A, S2207B, and S2210B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit", it is not the second KT state. It may shift to the first KT state (see steps S2208B and S2209B described later).

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to a probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2210A, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2212A described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is terminated (see steps S2213A and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, it shifts to the probability variation state). At the same time, the state is also shifted to the first KT state. See steps S2212B and S2213B described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S2214B described later). Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is terminated (see steps S2215B and S2010 to S2013). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 28 types of # 01 to # 28 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 28) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the KT shown in FIG. 12 (B) is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, even when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain prize ball can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By making the ball hit, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where the prize ball is targeted by the small hit is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by winning the special winning opening 24 unreasonably during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. Select the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the variation pattern is selected. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of range, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. To. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit, is opened. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits is high, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually performed. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in the above is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 11. Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (E), when it is determined that the second to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. May be decided. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. In this embodiment, it is determined that the second to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are missed or small hits, and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 08 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10. In this case, in the variable display of the background symbol on the effect display device 9, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 12 to # 14. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when it is determined that the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 12 or the second fluctuation pattern # 13 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second variation pattern # 14 with a predetermined revival display after the display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at which a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. Select the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the variation pattern is selected. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 15 to # 19. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 15 of the short shortening fluctuation. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 17) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 19 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the second variation pattern # 16 or the second variation pattern # including the battle effect is included. 18 may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation or later in the high probability / first KT state, it is selected from the second variation patterns # 20 to # 24. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the range after the 2nd fluctuation in the high probability / 1st KT state. May be determined as the second fluctuation pattern # 20 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. Further, even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when a big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 24 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), the second fluctuation pattern # 21 and the second fluctuation pattern including the battle effect are also determined to be a miss or a small hit after the second fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. # 23 may be decided.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 25 to # 28.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation of the shortened fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the display is executed, may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation is further executed in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 27 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, a second fluctuation pattern including a continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues is included. It may be decided to be # 26. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 28 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 9 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the background symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probable big hit, 6R probable big hit, 2R probable big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot in which the number of rounds during the jackpot game is small, the production of the mode of defeat may be executed in the battle production. ..

When determining the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of the second fluctuation pattern # 04, # 07, # 09, # 15, # 20, # 22, # 25, # 27, for example, it differs depending on the number of reserved storages. It may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation by the ratio. For example, it may be configured to accelerate the digestion of the reserved memory and increase the operating rate by determining the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation at a high rate as the number of reserved memories increases.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortened variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in a low probability state and a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in a high probability state.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined to be, the normal symbol display 10 is used to derive and display the symbol, and if it is determined to be out of order, the normal symbol display 10 is used to derive and display the outlier. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the missing symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed 0.1 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit. , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. Will be. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined to be, the normal symbol display 10 is used to derive and display the symbol, and if it is determined to be out of order, the normal symbol display 10 is used to derive and display the outlier. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the missing symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed 2.6 seconds. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit. , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. Will be.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening 24. For example, in this embodiment, the winning frequency of the game ball is low as compared with the case where a maximum of 10 game balls can be won per round in the big hit game state, but in the second KT state, one small hit game is in progress. It is possible to win about 1 to 3 game balls.

In this embodiment, the "winning frequency" indicates, for example, the winning ratio of the game balls to the large winning opening or the special winning opening 24 with respect to the number of gaming balls fired in the game area 7.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) Determines whether or not it is a normal figure. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for 0.2 seconds each in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. By making the variable winning ball device 15, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to shorten the closing period (interval period) in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 15 (1) is provided. The second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time is controlled, and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if the special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 100 times shortened fluctuation period of the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 99th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortened variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the fluctuation (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 is possible. The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit generation timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 802C (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols in.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is out of alignment. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result specification command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol and the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decoration symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decoration symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that the start prize has been given.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo display designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 13 (step S311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any of the processes of steps S300 to S307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S307 are as follows.
First special symbol normal process (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304A (8 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process (step S36) based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process of step S22.

First gate passage wait process (step S304A): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example).

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the first large winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Processing during opening of the first special winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process of passing through the first start port switch is terminated as it is.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a random number counter for determining a variation pattern for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. Further, in the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a random number for determining a jackpot (random 1), a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 2), and a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, the first special symbol display 8a is in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol is not made, and the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S50A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S51A). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by a timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is last terminated. It can be determined by setting the corresponding value and checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are used. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. If the 1KT flag is on, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the first KT flag is on, the probability is high / first. High probability / 1st KT background specification command is determined to be in the 1KT state, and high probability / 2nd KT is determined to be high probability / 2nd KT when the probability variation flag is on and the 2nd KT flag is on. Send a background specification command.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S63A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a big hit is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the processing after step S64A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step S63A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as the jackpot determination random number (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly dropped.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S63A, steps S64A to S161A. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a random number completely different from the random number for big hit judgment) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly dropped regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S64A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S67A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160A), the jackpot type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A. .. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S66A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In this embodiment, if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68A is confirmed.

In step S65A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probabilistic change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects any variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the gaming state. (Step S201). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 is to be used (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and changes. At the same time as starting the time measurement (step S1702), the measurement execution flag described later is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the decision result of the big hit type. Control is performed to send one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control the transmission of the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 moves to step S1123A and controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the process of step S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is forced. It is stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a on the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 27, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passage process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, a new start prize is generated. It is configured to store new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the KT count counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state is “0” (step S2010), and in “0”. If there is a case, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the KT count counter by "1" (step S2011), and whether or not the value becomes "0". (Step S2012). If the value of the KT count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2014. When the value of the KT count counter becomes "0", that is, when the 100th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state is completed, the CPU 56 resets the first KT flag indicating the first KT state (1st KT flag). Step S2013) and step S2014. As a result, the first KT state ends (shifts to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 fluctuations are completed in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, and the KT count counter if they are set (step S2015).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2019), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2020).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) in the special symbol process process. In the process of waiting for passage through the first gate, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, by executing the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, but the operation gate 17 is performed. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the game ball passes through and is detected by the actuating gate switch 17a.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to send the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and at the same time, the second KT flag indicating that it is in the second KT state. Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2210A), and sets the first KT flag indicating that it is the first KT state to the first KT state. (Step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT number counter indicating the low probability / remaining number of times in the first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning is generated in which the game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 (step S321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of the processes of steps S350 to S360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S350 to S360 are as follows.
Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Further, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second big hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S354A (11 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (in the case of a loss (including the case of a forced loss)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stopped symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process of step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the second large winning opening, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second big winning opening opening process (step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the special variable winning ball device 22. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the second small hit opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed by 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S350 (0 in this example).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350, it means that the second special symbol display 8b does not display the variation of the second special symbol, and This is the case during the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) or the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S50B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the first reserved storage number is 0, the game control CPU 560 confirms whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last variation display was finished (step S51B). Whether or not 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was terminated is set to 30 seconds by a timer for measuring the period during which the variation display is not executed when the variation display is last terminated. It can be determined by setting the corresponding value and checking whether the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have passed since the last variation display was completed, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the customer waiting demo display designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S60A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S63B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the processing after step S64B. As a result, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S63B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for big hit determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S65B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly dropped.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S63B, steps S64B to S161B. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a random number completely different from the random number for big hit judgment) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly dropped regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S64B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S66B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S67B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot based on random 2 (step S160B), the jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the step Move to S68B.

If the big hit is not made in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the small hit determination module (step S162B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (which may be a small hit determination random number) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S163B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S164B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S68A.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S68B is confirmed.

In step S65B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. 22. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit. Based on the type determination result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command to display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command to display result 7 specified command) is sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. Controls transmission.

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

In the second special symbol stop process (step S354), substantially the same process as the first special symbol stop process (step S304) shown in FIG. 24 is executed. That is, in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 24, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol stop process is generally explained. However, in the second special symbol stop processing, if the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second small hit opening pre-processing (step S358). ..

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second big hit end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not the 16R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the current jackpot (step S2208B). Whether or not the first KT state or the second KT state was controlled before the start of the big hit is, for example, the first KT state before the start of the big hit in the second special symbol stop process before the start of the big hit game. A first KT storage flag indicating that the situation has been set and a second KT storage flag indicating that the state has been in the second KT state are set, and in step S2208B, whether or not these the first KT storage flag or the second KT storage flag is set is set. You just have to check. If it is neither the 1st KT state nor the 2nd KT state before the start of the big hit, the 1st KT flag is set and the state shifts to the 1st KT state (step S2209B). If it was in the 1st KT state or the 2nd KT state before the start of the big hit, the 2nd KT flag is set and the state shifts to the 2nd KT state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

By executing the processes of steps S2208B to S2210B, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is reached before the start of the jackpot. Only the second KT state is set, and if the non-KT state is reached before the start of the big hit, the first KT state is set. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-handed operation is configured to perform the left-handed operation, and the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured on the assumption that. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase the gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is entered only when the KT state is reached before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2211B). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and at the same time, sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2212B). Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If it is neither a 6R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “100” in the KT count counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2216B).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative pattern process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. Further, the background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game or the KT state (second KT state) is executed (step S707). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S708). Further, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S709). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

31 to 33 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 is formed in the RAM with the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command). It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received.

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S624). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S624 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S631). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag indicating that the first KT state is set is reset (step S632). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the prize ball count counter for counting the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) (step S633), and also displays the effect. If the prize ball number display is displayed on the device 9, control is performed to erase the prize ball number display (step S634).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S635), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S636). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S637). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S638).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S640), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the high probability / first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the yellow display color) (step S641). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S642). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S643).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S645), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the high probability / second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S646). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S647). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S648).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step S650), the effect control CPU 201 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (step S650). Together with step S651), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the large winning opening) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening prize designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 sets a special prize opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening 24. Along with (step S654), 15 (corresponding to the number of prize balls per winning to the special winning opening 24) is added to the prize ball number counter (step S655).

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball is won in the large winning opening and when the game ball is won in the special winning opening 24 is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large winning opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24. You may.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display designation command (step S660), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the customer waiting demonstration display (step S661).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S670). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

[Prize ball display]
Next, an effect drawing for displaying the number of prize balls in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the prize ball as the game value given according to various game states is different. How to display in each game state will be described below. FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode during the jackpot state and the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 34 (A), during the 16R probability variation big hit game, the big hit effect is executed on the screen of the effect display device 9. In addition, the numerical value of the total number of acquisitions display image 158F001 on the upper right of the screen is added and updated based on the game ball that won the big prize opening during the big hit game. The total acquired number display image 158F001 is displayed until it is controlled to the normal state. During the big hit game, the numerical value of the total acquired number display image 158F001 is updated by adding 15 pt every time the game ball wins the big prize opening. After the 16R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (A), it is controlled to the second KT state as shown in FIG. 34 (B).

As shown in FIG. 34 (B), during the second KT state, a history icon image 158F002 showing the history of the 16R probability variation jackpot that was previously controlled is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. In the history icon image 158F002, a numerical value of 2400 indicating the number of prize balls given in the 16R probability variation big hit game state before being controlled to the second KT state is also displayed. Further, in the total acquisition number display image 158F001, a numerical value indicating that 2400 pieces have been acquired, which is the same as the history icon image 158F002, is displayed.

When a small hit occurs during the second KT state, it is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (C). When a small hit occurs as shown in FIG. 34 (C), a small hit image 158F003 of "small hit occurs!" Is displayed as a prize ball increase image on the screen of the effect display device 9, and "+15". The prize ball image 158F004 of is displayed. Further, the prize ball due to the small hit given during the second KT state is immediately updated and displayed on the history icon image 158F002. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the second KT state is displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001.

Here, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 changes stepwise depending on the total number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state. For example, the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 0 to 200 is a white display, and the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 201 to 400 is a blue display, and the second KT. The display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the state is 401 to 600 is red, and the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 601 or more is rainbow-colored. In this way, the display mode changes every time the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state increases by 200. FIG. 34 (C) shows a state in which the history icon image 158F002 is displayed in blue. The display mode of the history icon image 158F002 may be changed stepwise depending on the total number of acquisitions including during the big hit game.

Next, when the 6R probability variation jackpot is won during the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 34 (D), an effect indicating the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. During the 6R probability change big hit, the numerical value of the total number of acquisition display image 158F001 on the upper right of the screen is added and updated based on the game ball that won the big winning opening during the big hit game. The history icon image 158F002 may be displayed during the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the numerical value may be added and updated. Further, the history icon image 158F002 may be displayed separately for the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the numerical value of the history icon image 158F002 for the 6R probability variation jackpot may be added and updated.

Next, a case where the first KT state is controlled after the end of the 6R jackpot will be described. FIG. 34 (E) shows the screen of the effect display device 9 when a small hit occurs during the first KT state. In the first KT state, even if a small hit occurs, the numerical values of the total acquired number display image 158F001 and the history icon image 158F002 are not added and updated. If a small hit occurs during the first KT state, only one of the total acquired number display image 158F001 and the history icon image 158F002 may be updated.

After that, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 34 (F), an effect indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. During the 16R probability change big hit, the numerical value of the total number of acquisition display image 158F001 on the upper right of the screen is added and updated based on the game ball that won the big winning opening during the big hit game. After the 16R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (F), it is controlled to the second KT state as shown in FIG. 34 (G).

As shown in FIG. 34 (G), two history icon images 158F002 are displayed in the second KT state. The history icon image 158F002 displays one section from the 16R probability variation jackpot to the start of the next 16 probability variation jackpot as one section. In the history icon image 158F002 on the left side, the number of prize balls during the first 16R probability variation jackpot, the number of prize balls acquired by the small hit game in the second KT state, and the number of prize balls during the 6R probability variation jackpot are displayed as the total number. To. Further, in the history icon image 158F002 on the right side, the number of prize balls during the second 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed as the total number. Further, the total number of the two history icon images 158F002 is displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001.

When a small hit occurs during the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 34 (H), the small hit image 158F003 of "small hit occurs!" And the prize ball image 158F004 of "+15" are displayed. Is displayed. Further, the prize ball due to the small hit given during the second KT state is immediately updated and displayed on the history icon image 158F002 on the right side. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the second KT state is displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001. During the second KT state this time, 600 prize balls are generated. Therefore, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 on the right side is changed to the red display mode.

As shown in FIG. 34 (C), the history icon image 158F002 is a combination of the prize ball given during the second KT state and the prize ball given in the 16R probability variation jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state. It can be displayed as. By doing so, it is possible to suitably control the display of the prize ball acquired in the 16R probability variation jackpot game state and the display of the prize ball acquired in the second KT state. For example, the history icon image 158F002 displays the number of prize balls acquired in the 16R probability variation jackpot before entering the second KT state and the number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state, so how many prizes are awarded in this section. It is easy to know if there was a ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the prize ball given in the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state before being controlled to the second KT state can be displayed as the history icon image 158F002. In this way, the history of the awarded prize balls can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the prize ball due to the small hit given to the history icon image 158F002 during the second KT state can be immediately updated and displayed. By doing so, the history of the prize balls given in the series of sections can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34, it is possible to display the total acquired number display image 158F001 in the section of the continuous big hit gaming state different from the section targeted by the history icon image 158F002. By doing so, the history of the prize balls given in the section of the continuous big hit game state can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 34 (C) and 34 (H), when the number of prize balls given in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as a predetermined step, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 is changed according to the step. It is controlled to change to a different color. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of superiority by the display mode of the history icon image 158F002.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (E), the prize balls given when the small hit game state is controlled during the first KT state other than the second KT state are not added and displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001. Is controlled by. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the current state from being mistaken for the second KT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (G), the history icon is a combination of the prize ball given during the second KT state and the prize ball given during the 6R probability variation jackpot game after being controlled to the second KT state. It can be displayed as an image 158F002. By doing so, it is possible to preferably control the display showing the prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the display indicating the prize balls acquired during the second KT state.

Next, a process of displaying the prize balls acquired in each gaming state will be described. 35 to 37 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S707). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step 158FS001). If the big winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening has been won (Y in step 158FS001)), the effect control CPU 201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step). 158FS002), the process proceeds to step 158FS003. On the other hand, if the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the winning opening is not generated (N in step 158FS001)), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS008.

In step 158FS003, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the prize ball increase effect is being executed is set. If the prize ball increase effect execution flag is set (that is, if the prize ball increase effect is already being executed (Y in step 158FS003)), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS009. On the other hand, if the prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the prize ball increase effect is not yet executed (N in step 158FS003)), the effect control CPU 201 is totally acquired in the effect display device 9. An effect of increasing the number display (numerical value of the total acquired number display image 158F001) is started (step 158FS004). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the prize ball increase effect execution flag (step 158FS005). Then, the process proceeds to step 158FS006.

In step 158FS006, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game is a 16R probability variation jackpot. When the current game is a 16R probability variation jackpot (Y in step 158FS006), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot icon display flag (step 158FS007), and proceeds to step 158FS011. On the other hand, when the current game is not a 16R probability variation jackpot (N in step 158FS006), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS011 without performing the process of step 158FS007. By the processing of step 158FS006 and step 158FS007, the history icon image 158F002 is displayed every time the 16R probability variation jackpot is controlled. Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot may be confirmed by checking the value of the display result specification command.

The jackpot icon (history icon image 158F002) may be displayed for each jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. In such a case, it is desirable that the display mode of the jackpot icon (history icon image 158F002) differs depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, a flag may be set for each type of jackpot, and the set flag may be confirmed in step 158FS006 to display the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the type of jackpot by the process of step 158FS007. Further, when the control is performed in the second KT state, the numerical value of the history icon corresponding to the immediately preceding 16R probability variation jackpot may be updated.

In step 158FS008, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. When the prize ball increase effect execution flag is set (Y in step 158FS008), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS009. On the other hand, when the prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (N in step 158FS008), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS011.

In step 158FS009, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the prize ball increase effect has been completed. When the prize ball increase effect is completed (Y in step 158FS009), the effect control CPU 201 resets the prize ball increase effect execution flag (step 158FS010), and proceeds to step 158FS011. On the other hand, when the prize ball increase effect is not completed (N in step 158FS009), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS011 without performing the process of step 158FS010. Whether or not it is the end timing of the prize ball increase effect is determined by, for example, setting a timer for measuring the effect period of the prize ball increase effect when starting the prize ball increase effect. Can be determined by checking whether or not has timed out.

In step 158FS011, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set. If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if winning to the special winning opening 24 has occurred (Y in step 158FS011)), the effect control CPU 201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (that is,). Step 158FS012) and step 158FS013. On the other hand, if the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the special winning opening 24 has not been won (N in step 158FS011)), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS025.

In step 158FS013, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second KT state flag is set. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state (Y in step 158FS013)), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS014. On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step 158FS013), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS023.

In step 158FS023, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first KT state flag is set. When the first KT state flag is set (Y in step 158FS023), the effect control CPU 201 is set to no effect (step 158FS024), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the first KT state flag is not set (N in step 158FS023), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process without performing the process of step 158FS024.

Further, in step 158FS014, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the value of the winning number counter of the special winning opening, and proceeds to step 158FS015. The number of counts to the special winning opening is stored for each winning. In step 158FS015, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of prize balls in the second KT state is equal to or greater than a numerical value determined as a predetermined step. When the number of prize balls in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as the predetermined stage (Y in step 158FS015), the effect control CPU 201 changes the display mode of the icon to a color according to the stage. (Step 158FS016), the process proceeds to step 158FS017. On the other hand, when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is less than the numerical value determined as a predetermined step (N in step 158FS015), the effect control CPU 201 does not perform the process of step 158FS016, and the effect control CPU 201 does not perform the process of step 158FS017. Move to.

In step 158FS017, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning effect executing flag is set. When the winning effect executing flag is set (Y in step 158FS017), the effect control CPU 201 increments the winning effect waiting number counter by +1 (step 158FS018), and proceeds to step 158FS025. On the other hand, when the winning effect executing flag is not set (N in step 158FS017), the effect control CPU 201 displays a prize ball increase display as a "small hit!" As a prize ball increase image on the screen of the effect display device 9. The small hit image 158F003 of "" is displayed, and the prize ball image 158F004 of "+15" is displayed (step 158FS019). Then, an effect of increasing the total number of acquisitions is displayed (step 158FS020). Further, the effect control CPU 201 starts an effect of increasing the number of acquired icons (history icon image 158F002) (step 158FS021), sets a winning effect executing flag (step 158FS022), and proceeds to step 158FS025.

In step 158FS025, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning effect executing flag is set. When the winning effect execution flag is set (Y in step 158FS025), the effect control CPU 201 shifts to step 158FS026. On the other hand, if the winning effect executing flag is not set (N in step 158FS025), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process.

In step 158FS026, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect. When it is the end timing of the winning effect (Y in step 158FS026), the effect control CPU 201 ends various winning effects (step 158FS027) and shifts to step 158FS028. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the winning effect (N in step 158FS026), the effect control CPU 201 ends the process.

In step 158FS028, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0. When the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (Y in step 158FS028), the effect control CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step 158FS033) and ends the process. On the other hand, when the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (N in step 158FS028), the effect control CPU 201 decrements the winning effect waiting number counter by -1 (step 158FS029) and displays the prize ball increase display (step 158FS029). Step 158FS030). Further, the effect control CPU 201 starts an effect of increasing the total acquisition number display (step 158FS031), starts an effect of increasing the icon acquisition number display (step 158FS032), and ends the process.

As shown in step-up 158FS014 to 158FS016, when the number of prize balls given in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as a predetermined step, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 is changed to a color according to the step. Is controlled by. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of superiority by the display mode of the history icon image 158F002. More specifically, as the number of prize balls obtained by winning the small hit in the second KT state increases, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 changes, so that the value acquired by the color change can be known. ..

Further, as shown in steps 158FS023 and 158F024, the prize balls given when the small hit game state is controlled during the first KT state other than the second KT state are not added and displayed on the total number of acquisitions display image 158F001. Be controlled. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the current state from being mistaken for being in the second KT state. When the small hit is controlled during the first KT state, the numerical value of the history icon image 158F002 is not updated, but the numerical value of the total acquired number display image 158F001 may be updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special winning opening 24 has been described. However, a gaming machine configured to have a so-called general winning slot (a winning slot in which the variable winning ball device is not opened even if a prize is won and only a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls is paid out). In the above, the prize ball increase effect may be executed even when a prize is generated in the general prize opening. In such a case, the number of prize balls won in the general winning opening during the second KT state may be added and updated to the numerical value of the history icon image 158F002 and the numerical value of the total acquired number display image 158F001.

[About a modified example of the prize ball display]
Next, a modified example of the display related to the prize ball will be described. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode during the jackpot state and the KT state. After the 16R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 38 (A), it is controlled to the second KT state as shown in FIG. 38 (B). Since each display is the same as the display in FIGS. 34 (A) and 34 (B) described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled in the second KT state and the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state. Is displayed separately. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the small hit image 158F003 of "small hit occurs!" Is displayed as a prize ball increase image on the screen of the effect display device 9, and "+15". The prize ball image 158F004 is displayed. Further, the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed on the right side of the history icon image 158F002. Then, the prize ball due to the small hit given during the second KT state is immediately updated and displayed on the small hit history icon image 158F005. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the second KT state is displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001. The display timing of the small hit history icon image 158F005 may be displayed immediately after being controlled to the second KT state, and the numerical value at that time may be displayed as 0.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the display mode of the small hit history icon image 158F005 changes stepwise depending on the total number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state. For example, the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 0 to 200 is a white display, and the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 201 to 400 is a blue display, and the second KT. The display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the state is 401 to 600 is red, and the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 601 or more is rainbow-colored. In this way, the display mode changes every time the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state increases by 200. FIG. 38C shows a state in which the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed in blue.

When the 16R probability variation jackpot is won in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 38 (D) and 38 (E), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot gaming state before being controlled to the second KT state is displayed. , A combination effect is executed in which the display of the prize ball given during the second KT state is combined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), the numerical value of the total number of prize balls displayed image 158F001 showing the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game at the start of the big hit and the number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state are shown. The numerical value of the small hit history icon image 158F005 to be shown is displayed on the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (E), these two numerical values are added up, and the total value is displayed large on the screen.

After that, in the second KT state controlled after the 16R probability variation jackpot, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won again, as shown in FIG. 38 (F), during the 16R probability variation jackpot game, the jackpot is hit on the screen of the effect display device 9. The production is executed. In this way, when the 16R probability variation, which is the most advantageous big hit, is continuously won, the mode of the production may be changed.

A state when a small hit occurs in the second KT state controlled after FIG. 38 (F) will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (G). As shown in FIG. 38 (G), when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the small hit image 158F003 of "small hit occurs!" Is displayed as a prize ball increase image on the screen of the effect display device 9. At the same time, the prize ball image 158F004 of "+15" is displayed. Further, as a history icon, a history icon image 158F002, which is a combination of the number of prize balls in the first 16R jackpot and the subsequent second KT state, is displayed on the left side of the screen. Further, on the right side thereof, a history icon image 158F002 showing the number of prize balls acquired in the second 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed. Further, on the right side thereof, a small hit history icon image 158F005 showing a prize ball in the small hit acquired during the current second KT state is displayed.

In FIG. 38 (G), the number of prize balls in the second KT state is 600. Therefore, the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the small hit history icon image 158F005, the prize ball due to the small hit given during the second KT state is immediately updated and displayed. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the two big hit games and the second KT state is displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001.

As shown in FIG. 38 (C), the prize ball given in the big hit game state and the prize ball given in the second KT state can be displayed as separate history icon image 158F002 and small hit history icon image 158F005. be. By doing so, it is possible to preferably control the display showing the prize balls acquired during the jackpot game state and the display indicating the prize balls acquired during the second KT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the prize ball given in the big hit game state before being controlled to the second KT state can be displayed as the history icon image 158F002. In this way, the history of the awarded prize balls can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the prize ball due to the small hit given to the small hit history icon image 158F005 during the second KT state can be immediately updated and displayed. By doing so, the history of the prize balls given in the series of sections can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, it is possible to display the total number of acquisitions display image 158F001 in a section in a continuous big hit gaming state different from the section targeted by the history icon image 158F002 and the small hit history icon image 158F005. By doing so, the history of the prize balls given in the section of the continuous big hit game state can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 (C) and 38, when the number of prize balls given in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as a predetermined step, the display mode of the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed. The color changes according to the stage. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of superiority depending on the display mode of the history image.

Also in the modified example, the prize balls given when the small hit game state is controlled during the first KT state other than the second KT state are controlled so as not to be additionally displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the person from misunderstanding that he / she is in the second KT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled in the second KT state and the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state are separately displayed. It can be displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 38 (D) and 38 (E), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state and the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state. A combination effect that combines and is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a special feeling by the combination production.

The combination effect as a special effect may be executed when the number of prize balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and may not be executed when the number of prize balls is less than a predetermined number. Specifically, when the number of prize balls given during the second KT state is 600 or more, the combination effect is executed, and when the number of prize balls given during the second KT state is less than 600, the combination is performed. You may not perform the production. By doing so, when the number of prize balls given is less than a predetermined number, the combination effect is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the stress that the combination effect is repeated a plurality of times, and when the number of prize balls given is more than a predetermined number. At one point, the fun of the game can be improved by giving a special feeling through the combination production.

In addition, the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state, the display of the prize ball given during the second KT state, and the jackpot gaming state after being controlled to the second KT state. The display of the prize ball given in is may be displayed separately. That is, when a big hit is further generated from the state of FIG. 38C, the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the big hit may be displayed on the right side of the small hit history icon image 158F005. Then, the display of the prize ball given in the big hit game state before being controlled to the second KT state, the display of the prize ball given during the second KT state, and the big hit game state after being controlled to the second KT state. It is also possible to execute a combination effect in combination with the display of the prize ball given in. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a special feeling by the combination production.

[About the second embodiment]
Further, the following processing may be executed for the prize ball number display of the second embodiment. In the command analysis process described above, the effect control CPU 201 may control the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern. For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to newly start the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is performed. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the second KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

Further, in the command analysis process described above, the effect control CPU 201 may control the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern. For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In this case, if the prize ball number display according to any pattern is not yet displayed, the control to start the prize ball number display is newly performed by the second KT pattern. Further, if the prize ball number display is already performed by the jackpot pattern or the first KT pattern, the control is performed to switch to the display of the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern.

In such a case, the number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game or during the KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state), but the prize is awarded when the KT state is terminated and the low probability / non-KT state is restored. When the value of the ball count counter is reset (cleared to 0), the display of the prize ball count display ends.

A second embodiment of the prize ball number display process will be further described. 39 to 42 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display process (step S707). In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if the winning opening is winning), the effect control CPU 201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S501) and wins the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S502). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is set to the effect display device 9 at the first speed. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S503). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S504). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number display is displayed during the big hit game or during the KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big winning opening When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 24, the prize ball increase effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased by one. In this embodiment, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds). It is a production that is executed in such a manner. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed during the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed during the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this embodiment, the fact that the big winning opening winning flag is set (a winning in the big winning opening has occurred) means that the big hit game is in progress and the prize ball number display by the big hit pattern is displayed. Therefore, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern in step S503, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the winning opening is not generated), the effect control CPU 201 is set whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S505). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S502 or step S505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded a prize in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1) (step S506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 indicates the number of prize balls displayed by the prize ball counter after the number of prize balls is increased by 1. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S507). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S508). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this embodiment, when a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number counter. However, by executing the processes of steps S500 to S509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but is the first speed (this example). Then, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball number increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, it takes 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of all 15 prize balls for one prize in the big prize opening. The number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase in the number of prize balls is displayed only up to, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls will continue to increase is displayed. We will continue to execute the first prize ball increase effect until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this embodiment, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the big hit game is ended. By then, the production that increases the number of all prize balls is configured to be completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if winning to the special winning opening 24 has occurred), the effect control CPU 201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S511), and the second KT. It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state, the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, so the process is terminated as it is without performing the prize ball increase effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S514). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect has not been executed yet), the effect control CPU 201 is the effect ball at the first speed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S515). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S516). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed. Therefore, in step S515, the first KT pattern is used. In the displayed prize ball number display, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 24), the third prize ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S518). If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S514 or step S518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded a prize in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 is completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1) (step S519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 indicates the number of prize balls displayed by the prize ball counter after the number of prize balls is increased by 1. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S520). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S521). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is awarded to the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and immediately. 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S655), but the prize ball number display may be immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processes of steps S510 to S522. Instead, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball number is gradually increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 second in this example). Therefore, in this embodiment, for one prize in the special prize opening 24 in the first KT state, 0.1 seconds × 15 = 1.5 until the update of the number of all 15 prize balls is completed. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect will be continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this embodiment, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is ended. By the time it is done, it is configured to finish the production in which the number of all prize balls increases.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S512 (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the effect effect (step S523). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. Add 1 (step S525). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

If the winning effect executing flag is not set (that is, the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 9 (for example, character display such as "+15"). (Step S526) and control to start the winning effect on the effect display device 9 (step S527). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the winning effect executing flag (step S528). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S529). If the flag for executing the third prize ball increase effect is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S533.

If the third prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S530). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start an effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start a third prize ball increase effect (step S531). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S532). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed, so that the second KT pattern is used in step S531. In the displayed and enlarged prize ball number display, the third prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example) is started.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S517 or step S529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the effect effect (step S534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started. Whether or not) is confirmed (step S535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 indicates the number of prize balls displayed by the prize ball counter after the number of prize balls is increased by 1. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S536). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize ball at the second speed in the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of third prize balls (step S537). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 matches the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S538). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the flag for executing the third prize ball increase effect (step S539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and immediately. Although 15 is added to the prize ball number counter (see step S655), 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number display by executing the processes of steps S510, S517, S529 to S532, S535 to S359. The prize ball number display is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the prize ball number increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The prize ball number display is updated in such an manner. Therefore, in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds × 15 = 7.5 until the update of the number of all 15 prize balls is completed for one prize in the special prize opening 24 in the second KT state. The prize ball number display will be updated over a second. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be awarded before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase production will be continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated).

Here, in this embodiment, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game is ended. In some cases, the production that increases the number of all prize balls may not be completed. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not it is executed, it is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, so if the third prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the third prize will be displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The ball increase effect is continuously executed (furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag is set (step S540). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, when the winning effect is started in step S527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the winning effect (step S542).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S544). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) on the effect display device 9 (step S545), and starts the prize effect on the effect display device 9. Control is performed (step S546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S547).

In this embodiment, when the special winning opening 24 is won during the second KT state by executing the processes of steps S524 to S528 and S540 to S547, the prize ball increase display is displayed. At the same time, a prize-winning production is executed. In this case, it is possible that a new prize will be awarded to the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect. In such a case, the prize will be waited until the running winning effect is completed. After the running prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this embodiment, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize ball increase displays and the winning effect are displayed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible to do this. In this embodiment, the prize ball number display process (step S707) is configured as an effect executed in the effect control main process, and the variable display is being executed, or the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress. Regardless of whether or not it is executed, it is executed every time the timer interrupt occurs, so if the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is completed. The prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (furthermore, the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

In this embodiment, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 24 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 24 is won. (See steps S523, S533, S534).

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display is displayed or a prize production is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24. For example, the special winning opening lamp 24a is further used. It may be configured to be lit.

Further, in this embodiment, there is a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 24, and the effect that the number of prize balls increases by 1 is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to have a so-called general winning slot (a winning slot in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls is paid out without opening the variable winning ball device even if a prize is won). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed and the effect that the number of prize balls increases by 1 may be executed. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a production that goes on. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this embodiment will be described. 43 to 46 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 43 shows a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 44 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 45 and 46 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 43 to 46, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 43, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 43A, when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 300 according to the jackpot pattern, and for example, the character 301 is displayed, and the character 301 is displayed. A case where a character display 302 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line is shown. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the prize ball number display 300 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 300 based on the jackpot pattern. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43B, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S500 to S509). ). In this embodiment, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 43 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 303 according to the first KT pattern (see steps S639 and S644), and a small hit. When is generated, for example, a character display 304 such as "small hit occurrence!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, a case is shown in which the prize ball number display 303 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 303 by the first KT pattern. ing.

Next, it is assumed that a prize has been awarded to the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the second prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S510 to S522). ). In this embodiment, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, and is shown in FIG. 44 (C). As described above, when the update of all the prize ball number displays is completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. do. In the example shown in FIG. 45A, when the second KT state is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 305 by the second KT pattern (see step S649), and a small hit occurs. In this case, for example, a character display 306 such as "Small hit occurred!" Is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the prize ball number display 305 may be displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 305 by the second KT pattern. It is shown.

Next, it is assumed that a prize has been awarded to the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 305 is started (see step S530). In the example shown in FIG. 45 (B), as an effect effect, a case where a predetermined effect image 307 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 305 is shown. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 24, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S526) and a prize effect is started (see step S527). In the example shown in FIG. 45B, there is a case where a predetermined character 308 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 309 such as “+15” is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is started in the effect display device 9, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 3 is started (steps S510, S517, S529). (See S539). In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45 (C) to 46 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second prize ball increase effect is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 45 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523). However, in this case, since the prize-winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 46 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 46 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the prize ball increase display is displayed later (see step S526) and the prize is won, as shown in FIG. 46 (H), based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting prize effect. The production is started (see step S527).

After that, until the display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls based on the prize to the special prize opening 24 additionally generated in FIG. 46 (E) is updated, the second prize ball increase production is performed. Will be executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, as an effect effect, a case where an effect image 307 in a form of glittering around the prize ball number display 305 is displayed is shown, but the case is limited to such a mode. do not have. For example, as an effect effect, it may be configured to perform an effect of an aspect that acts on the prize ball number display 305 in some form, such as displaying an image of an aspect that covers the prize ball number display 305. By acting on the prize ball number display 305 in this way, it may be possible to perform an effect that makes the prize ball number display 305 difficult to see.

Further, in this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls is shown. Not limited to this, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 43, and the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 45 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the big hit game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the big hit game. It may be configured to be displayed in total, or (2) the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be continuously displayed until the KT state is terminated and the non-KT state is entered. It may be configured. In addition, according to the aspect of (2), it is possible to improve the interest in the game by being able to recognize the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 47 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 47, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 24 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S510, S517, S529 to S539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S523). Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 47, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed by taking over the number of prize balls increased by the second prize. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 47, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 47. In addition, after the winning effect for the first prize is finished, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, all the prize ball number displays are updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning productions are not finished, as shown in FIG. 47, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game, It is possible to continue to perform the third prize ball increase production and the winning production.

The effect of increasing the number of prize balls in the second embodiment or the modification may be applied as the process of displaying the number of prize balls in the first embodiment.

[Other variants]
Next, modification examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.

In each of the above embodiments, various patterns can be considered as a method of displaying the history icon depending on how far the section is to be displayed. For example, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, a history icon may be displayed for each jackpot, or for a jackpot that shifts to the second KT state, the jackpot and the second KT state may be set as one section. One section may be from the second KT state to the next big hit. More specifically, the history icon may be displayed by dividing the section such as "16R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 6R probability variation jackpot" and "16R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 4R normal jackpot". Further, the history icon may be displayed by dividing the section such as "16R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 16R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state" and "4R normal jackpot". Further, a history icon may be displayed by dividing a section such as "16R probability variation jackpot", "second KT state + 16R probability variation jackpot", and "second KT state + 4R normal jackpot". Also, even if the section is divided and the history icon is displayed, such as "16R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 16R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 6R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state", "4R normal jackpot". good. That is, it is desirable to divide the section before and after the big hit that becomes the second KT state, before and after the big hit that does not become the second KT state, before and after the second KT state, and the like.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when a plurality of big hits are consecutive (so-called consecutive villas), the result display displayed at the end of the consecutive villas shows the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit and the second KT state. The number of prize balls won only in the middle and the total number of winnings may be displayed separately on the screen. This makes it possible to recognize how many game balls have been acquired in which game state.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the section of the number of acquisitions in which the history icon is changed stepwise may be as follows. For example, it may be a target of a section in which the section of the number of acquisitions in the previous jackpot + the number of acquisitions in the second KT state + the number of acquisitions in the jackpot after the end of the second KT state is changed. Further, it may be a section other than that, and the number of acquisitions for changing depending on the section may be different.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the prize balls won in the general winning openings may be added as the number of winnings. Then, at the end of the big hit when the second KT state ends, the combination effect may be executed in consideration of the number of prize balls in the general winning opening.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a main display device and a sub display device may be provided, and the prize ball display process may be executed on either one or both display devices.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the start timing of the combination effect may be a timing other than the timing at the start of the big hit. For example, the start timing of the combination effect may be the timing at the end of the second KT state (before the start of the big hit) or the timing at the end of the big hit that does not enter the second KT state. In the case of a big hit that does not enter the second KT state, the history icon may be displayed together with the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the number of prize balls acquired in the second KT state is less than a predetermined number, the combination effect may not be executed. Even in such a case, it is desirable to display the total number of acquisitions. Further, the display mode of the total acquisition number display may be different depending on whether the combination effect is executed or not. Further, in the one that executes the combination effect regardless of the number of prize balls in the second KT state, the mode of the combination effect may be different depending on the difference in the total number of acquisitions. The predetermined number of prize balls is the following value. For example, in the case of a small hit of about 1/4 before a big hit of about 1/48 occurs, about 12 small hits occur. Therefore, considering that one small hit will win approximately two prizes, it is assumed that 12 times x 2 x 15 = 360 will be paid out. Therefore, about 360 pieces may be set as a predetermined number as an average value.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the player may be able to select whether or not to display the history icon. For example, during a demonstration or a big hit game, whether or not to display the history icon may be selected by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player, such as a push button or a cross key.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, when there are more prize balls than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one small hit game state normally assumed, the display mode and the sound mode of the effect are changed. You may do so. For example, if there are 30 prize balls with 2 prizes in the special prize opening in one small hit, when there are 3 or more prizes in the special prize opening, the effect will be different from the usual one. It may be a display mode or a sound mode.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 200 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 200 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. (2) A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (after the stop) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 200 may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 200 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode shown by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to relationships such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one has 100% allocation and the other has 0% allocation).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. The variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variable displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by repeatedly lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display alternately. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. May be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. It is also possible to provide two boards with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 is used on another board (for example, the figure). For the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. shown in 5, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the voice output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing controls related to voice control and lamp control in response to the operation, and further changing the received command to a command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. You may send it to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above embodiments, and similarly to the sound output board 70 and the lamp. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, an example is a gaming machine in which a gaming medium is used as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium such as a ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variable region inside (a probability changing region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability change area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball passes through the probability change area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one that displays the payout of a prize ball as a gaming value acquired during a small hit time, which is a special state (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-30634). However, in the conventional gaming machine, how to control the display indicating the game value acquired during the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state and the display indicating the game value acquired during the special state is not considered. rice field. The gaming machine of the feature unit 158F was conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to display the gaming value acquired during the advantageous state and the gaming value acquired during the special state. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing control.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
An advantageous state (for example) in which identification information (for example, a special symbol, a decorative symbol, a background symbol) is variablely displayed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot display result) is derived and displayed. , A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) capable of controlling any of a plurality of gaming states including the advantageous state, and
It is provided with a display means (for example, an effect display device 9) capable of displaying the given game value (for example, a prize ball).
The state control means is
When a predetermined display result (for example, a small hit display result) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed, the predetermined state (for example, a small hit game state) in which the game value less than the advantageous state can be given is set. Controllable and
Based on the control to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which the frequency of control to the predetermined state is higher than that of the normal state.
The display means can display the game value given during the special state and the display showing the game value given in the advantageous state before being controlled by the special state (for example). , As shown in FIG. 34 (C), the prize ball given during the second KT state and the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state are combined to form a history icon image 158F002. Can be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control the display indicating the game value acquired during the advantageous state and the display indicating the game value acquired during the special state.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above
The display means can display the game value given in the advantageous state before being controlled to the special state as a history image (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the display means is controlled to the second KT state. The prize ball given in the big hit game state before being played can be displayed as the history icon image 158F002).

According to such a configuration, the history of the given game value can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above
The display means can immediately update and display the game value given to the history image during the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 34C, the second KT is displayed on the history icon image 158F002. The prize ball due to the small hit given during the state can be immediately updated and displayed).

According to such a configuration, the history of the game value given in a series of sections can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
The display means can display a display of the total number of acquisitions in a continuous section in an advantageous state different from the section targeted by the history image (for example, as shown in FIG. 34, the history icon image 158F002 is the target. It is possible to display the total acquired number display image 158F001 in the section of the continuous big hit gaming state different from the section to be played).

According to such a configuration, the history of the game value given in the continuous advantageous state section can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
The display means can display the historical image by changing the display mode stepwise according to the given game value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 158FS014 to 158FS016 in FIG. 36, the display means is given in the second KT state. When the number of prize balls given is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as a predetermined step, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 is changed to a color according to the step).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of superiority depending on the display mode of the history image.

(6) In the gaming machine of (4) or (5) above,
The display means does not add and display the game value given when controlled to the predetermined state other than during the special state to the total acquisition number display (for example, as shown in 158FS023, 158F024 of FIG. 36). The prize ball given when the small hit game state is controlled during the first KT state other than the second KT state is not added to the total number of acquired number display image 158F001).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the person from misunderstanding that he / she is in a special state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The display means can separately display the display of the game value given in the advantageous state before being controlled by the special state and the display of the game value given in the special state (the display means). For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled in the second KT state and the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state are separately displayed. Can be displayed),
A special effect that combines the display of the game value given in the advantageous state before being controlled by the special state and the display of the game value given during the special state (for example, FIG. 38 (D)). , (E), a combination effect of combining the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled in the second KT state and the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state). (For example, the effect control microcomputer 200) is further provided.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a special feeling by the special production.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above
When the game value given during the special state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the special effect executing means executes the special effect, and the game value given during the special state is less than a predetermined number. When the special effect is not executed (for example, as shown in the modified example, when the number of prize balls given during the second KT state is 600 or more, the combination effect is executed and the special effect is given during the second KT state. If the number of prize balls is less than 600, the combination effect is not executed).

According to such a configuration, when the given game value is less than a predetermined number, the special effect is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the stress that the special effect is repeated a plurality of times, and the given game value is a predetermined number. In the above cases, the interest of the game can be improved by giving a special feeling by the special production.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided with the following means.
(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is counted based on a predetermined opportunity (for example, a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening or a special winning opening 24). A counting display executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of updating and displaying a display (for example, a prize ball number display) is provided, and the counting display executing means displays the updated counting result. The count display can be updated and displayed by the first pattern in which the period until display is the first period and the second pattern in which the period until the updated count result is displayed is a second period longer than the first period. (For example, when the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the prize balls are displayed in the second KT pattern. When displaying the number display 305, it is characterized in that the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of controlling a plurality of states including at least a first state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a second state (for example, a second KT state). The portion for executing steps S305 to S307, S355 to S357, S2208A, and S2210B in 560) is provided, and the counting display executing means can update and display the counting display by the first pattern when controlled to the first state. When controlled to the second state, the count display can be updated and displayed by the second pattern (for example, in the big hit game state, the number of prize balls is displayed in the prize ball number display 300 displayed by the big hit pattern. The display may be configured to increase by 1 and, in the second KT state, display to increase the number of prize balls by 1 in the prize ball number display 305 displayed by the second KT pattern). According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

(Means 3) In the means 2, the state control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the game control microcomputer 56 executes steps S358 to S360). As the first state, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which the degree of advantage for the player is higher than that of the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is in steps S305 to S307, S355). ~ S357 execution part), as the second state, based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot), the special state (for example, the first state) compared to before the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured to be able to be controlled to a special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a portion that executes steps S2208A and S2210B) so that the frequency of being controlled to the 2KT state) is increased. According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

(Means 4) When written in the means 3 and controlled in a special state, the winning frequency of the game medium is lower than in the case where the game medium is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the big hit game state, the game is played per round. While a maximum of 10 balls can be won, in the second KT state, about 1 to 3 game balls can be won during one small hit game), and the counting display executing means is When controlled to a special state, the count display is updated and displayed at a slower update speed than when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern in the jackpot game state). When displaying, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds), and when the number of prize balls display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the number of prize balls is displayed. It may be configured to increase the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, since the winning frequency of the game medium is low when controlled in a special state, it is possible to create a continuous feeling of the counting display by slowing down the updating speed of the updating display of the counting display. can.

(Means 5) In the means 3 or the means 4, the counting display executing means can continuously execute the update display of the counting display when it is controlled to the special state and then controlled to the special state again (for example,). As shown in FIG. 47, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, all the prize balls are displayed in the third prize ball increase effect. If the update of is not completed, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the fluctuation display after the end of the small hit game and the next small hit game can be continuously executed to increase the third prize ball. ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a continuous feeling of the count display by making it possible to continuously execute the update display of the count display.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 3 to the means 5, an approach advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult to enter (means 6). For example, a variable starting device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15) that can be changed to a closed state, and a special variable device (for example, a special variable device that is provided on the downstream side of the variable starting device and can be changed into an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state). For example, in the special variable winning ball device 22) and the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) capable of executing the variable display based on the entry of the game medium into the variable starting device, steps S350 to S354 are performed. By executing this, the second starting winning opening 14 of the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a portion for executing the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball), and the state control means is variable. Based on the fact that the display result of the display is a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol), it is possible to control the special variable device to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that changes the approach advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). , The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to execute steps S358 to S360). According to such a configuration, by changing the mode of the update display of the count display according to the state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed.

(Means 7) The means 6 includes a specific variable device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that can change between an approach advantageous state and an approach disadvantageous state, and the state control means displays a variable display result as a specific display result. Based on (for example, a jackpot symbol), it is possible to control the specific variable device to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) in which the specific variable device is changed to an approach advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 is a step. (S305 to S307, S355 to S357 are executed), the counting display executing means displays the counting display based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific variable device and the game medium has entered the special variable device as a predetermined trigger. The update display is possible, and the count display is updated and displayed at different update speeds depending on whether the game medium enters the specific variable device or the special variable device (for example, in the big hit game state with a big hit pattern). When displaying the prize ball number display 300, a display is performed in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) based on the occurrence of a prize in the large winning opening. When the prize ball number display 305 is displayed in the second KT pattern in the 2KT state, the prize ball number is set to 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) based on the winning of the special winning opening 24. It may be configured to increase in increments). According to such a configuration, the mode of the update display of the count display is different depending on which variable device the game medium has entered, thereby improving the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed. be able to.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to the means 7, the counting display executing means is updated differently depending on whether the counting display is updated and displayed according to the first pattern and the counting display is updated and displayed according to the second pattern. The count display is updated and displayed according to the speed (for example, when the prize ball number display 300 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 second), and the display is performed. When the prize ball number display 305 is displayed in the 2KT pattern, it may be configured to increase the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). According to such a configuration, by making the update speed of the update display of the count display different according to the pattern of updating the count display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the update display of the count display is performed. ..

(Explanation of feature section 269F)
Next, the feature unit 269F will be described. The feature unit 269F is controlled to a special state until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed after the end of the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. In the special state, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends. Further, the feature unit 269F can simultaneously variably display the first variable display corresponding to the first special symbol and the second variable display corresponding to the second special symbol, and in a special state, the second variable display can be displayed. The corresponding variable display is executed in a manner that is easy for the player to see. Then, regarding the display control of the remaining number of times, the feature unit 269F displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state, and when the predetermined period elapses after the start of the special state. Display control is executed to display the remaining number of times and update the display of the remaining number of times each time the subsequent variable display is started.

(Design display control)
As shown in FIG. 1, the feature unit 269F executes a game aiming at the first start winning opening 13 provided in the left game area of the game area 7 in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Further, in the feature unit 269, as shown in FIG. 1, a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state as a special state after the end of the jackpot gaming state which is advantageous for the player. Then, the game is executed aiming at the second start winning opening 14 divided into the right game area in the game area 7.

Further, the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages in the first starting winning opening 13 is 4, and the upper limit of the number of second reserved storages in the second starting winning opening 14 is also 4. Based on the reserved memory corresponding to the variable display being digested, the first variable display by the first special symbol or the second variable display by the second special symbol is executed.

In the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the first variable display is likely to be executed, and the display control of the background symbol corresponding to the first variable display is executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, in the low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, or high probability / second KT state as special states, the second variable display is likely to be executed, and the second variable display is easily executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. 2 Display control of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display is executed. Here, in the normal state, only the first variable display is displayed as the background symbol, and in the special state, only the second variable display is displayed as the background symbol, and the other variable display is controlled so as not to be displayed. Even in such a case, a special symbol display controlled by the game control means and other variable display devices controlled by the effect control means (for example, turning on and off by a lamp arranged outside the liquid crystal different from the special figure). The state of fluctuation of the other variable display is shown by the repetition of). In the case of variable display at the same time, the variable display of the small symbol in a reduced form of the background image may be displayed in the corner of the screen in response to the variable display of the one that is not displayed as the background image. In such a case, in the normal state, the variable display of the small symbol corresponding to the second variable display is displayed in the corner of the screen, and in the special state, the variable display of the small symbol corresponding to the first variable display is displayed in the corner of the screen. It may be shown.

(Display control of remaining number of times)
The effect control CPU 201 displays the characters "chance time" on the screen of the effect display device 9 when the low probability / first KT state as a special state is reached after the end of the big hit. Further, the low probability / first KT state continues for 100 variable displays if no big hit occurs in the middle. The effect control CPU 201 is a control that displays that the low probability / first KT state is executed 100 times at the ending of the big hit before the start of the low probability / first KT state (low probability / the number of remaining variable displays). Control to display the remaining number of variable displays in the first KT state) is executed.

The effect control CPU 201 controls so that the remaining number of 100 times displayed before the start of the low probability / first KT state is not displayed at the start of the low probability / first KT state. After that, the effect control CPU 201 displays the remaining number of times again when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the low probability / first KT state, and controls to update the display of the remaining number of times each time the subsequent variable display is started. To execute. Hereinafter, a specific production screen will be used for explanation.

(Example of production operation in feature section 269F)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation in the feature unit 269F. 48 (A) to (H) show various effect operations executed on the screen of the effect display device 9 in chronological order. FIG. 48 (A) is a diagram showing before the start of the special state, which is usually after the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 48 (A), before the start of the special state, the start of the low probability / first KT state, which is the special state, is displayed in the upper center of the screen as the chance time image 269F001. Further, below the chance time image 269F001, the first remaining number display 269F002 indicating that the low probability / first KT state continues 100 times is displayed. The player can know the number of variable displays until the end of the special state by displaying "100 times" indicated by the first remaining number display 269F002.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), at the start of the low probability / first KT state, which is a special state, the background symbol at the time of a big hit is displayed. At this time, the chance time image 269F001 and the first remaining number display 269F002 are erased. Next, FIG. 48 (C) shows how the second variable display by the second special symbol is executed during the low probability as a special state / the first KT state by three downward arrows. After the big hit is completed, the second variable display is started by winning a game ball in the second start winning opening 14. If the first hold storage buffer has the first hold storage, the first variable display is started at the start of the special state. However, the first variable display is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The first variable display may be executed at the edge of the screen as a small symbol.

After that, the state of the screen when 50 times of variable display has elapsed is shown in FIG. 48 (D). When the variable display is executed 50 times, the first remaining number display 269F002 showing the variable display in the remaining low probability / first KT state is displayed in the center of the screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the first remaining number display 269F002 displayed in the center is displayed as a small second remaining number display 269F003 in the upper right of the screen. At this time, the combination of the out-of-order symbols due to the variable display this time is displayed as the background symbol in the center of the screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (F), the display of the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated at the start of the 51st variable display. As a result, the remaining number of 50 times display is updated to 49 times. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (G), the second remaining number display 269F003 is erased during the 51st variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (H), at the 51st variable display stop, the combination of the out-of-order symbols is displayed as the background symbol, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed again in the upper right of the screen.

(Effects of feature section 269F, examples of deformation, etc.)
If the remaining number of times is displayed at the start of the special state, the first variable display and the second variable display can be executed at the same time at the start of the special state, so that the remaining number of times is reduced by two times, which may cause a sense of discomfort. be. However, in the feature unit 269F, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the special state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the first is displayed at the start of the special state. The remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the feature unit 269F displays the second remaining number display 269F003 when the variable display 50 times has elapsed, and the second variable display is started every time the subsequent variable display is started. The remaining number display 269F003 is updated.

By doing so, the first variable display and the second variable display are variably displayed at the same time at the start of the low probability / first KT state, which is a special state, so that the remaining number of times is reduced by two times. However, at the start of the special state, the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed. After that, the remaining number of times display is not displayed, and the second remaining number of times display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed. At this time, the first hold storage does not remain in the first hold buffer, and it is unlikely that the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time in the subsequent variable display because it is right-handed. .. Therefore, since the display of the remaining number of times is appropriately executed, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed in the gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time.

If the second hold storage does not exist in the second hold storage buffer at the start of the special state, only the first variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is executed. At this time, if the remaining number of times is continuously displayed, the background symbol does not change at all because the second variable display is not executed, but only the remaining number of times due to the first variable display is updated. However, in the feature unit 269F, since the remaining number of times is not displayed at the start of the special state, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed in the gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time.

Further, the case where the remaining number of times is displayed after executing the variable display 50 times as a predetermined period from the start of the low probability as a special state / the first KT state has been described, but the predetermined period is stored in the first hold storage buffer. It may be a period longer than the total period of the execution period of the variable display as the first reserved storage. Specifically, since a maximum of four hold storages are stored in the first hold storage buffer, the remaining number of times is displayed based on the elapse of a period longer than the total period of the four first variable displays. You can do it.

By doing so, the remaining number of times is displayed when a period longer than the total period of the execution periods of the maximum four first variable displays corresponding to the first reserved storage stored in the first reserved storage buffer has elapsed. To. Therefore, when the remaining number of times is displayed again, the variable display related to the first variable display ends, and it is possible to reduce the discomfort when updating the display of the remaining number of times. For a period longer than the total period of the execution period of the first variable display, check the information of the first hold storage stored in the first hold storage buffer, and set a time longer than the total time of the fluctuation pattern. do it. At this time, the predetermined period for displaying the remaining number of times may be set to a period immediately after the total period, or a period considerably different from the total period (for example, after 5 minutes) may be set.

Further, the remaining number of times may be displayed after all the variable display as the first hold storage stored in the first hold storage buffer is executed. That is, the remaining number of times may be displayed after the first variable display by the maximum of four reserved storages stored in the first reserved storage buffer is executed.

By doing so, at least the remaining number of times is displayed after the first variable display is executed four times when the special state is started, so that the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time. Is eliminated, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of strangeness when updating the display of the remaining number of times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (F), the effect control CPU 201 displays the second remaining number display 269F003 at the start of the 51st variable display after the lapse of 50 variable displays, and is shown in FIG. 48 (G). As shown in FIG. 48 (H), the remaining number display is erased during the variable display, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is controlled to be displayed again when the 51st variable display is stopped.

By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by updating the remaining number of times based on the first variable display by executing the first variable display during the execution of the second variable display. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the remaining number of times decreases in the middle of the variable display even though the second variable display is still being executed.

In the feature unit 269F, the low probability / first KT state has been described as a special state that is controlled until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed after the end of the big hit. However, the special condition may be any other condition. For example, the special state may be a state in which the probabilistic state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, in the special state, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls according to the number of shot balls, is higher than that when the control is not performed. It may be in a state of being executed a predetermined number of times. Further, the special state may be a state in which the time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the symbol is shortened is executed a predetermined number of times. Further, the special state may be a state in which a state in which these advantageous states are combined continues a predetermined number of times.

As the remaining number display, the first remaining number display 269F002 displayed in the center and the second remaining number display 269F003 displayed in the corner of the screen are shown. However, the remaining number of times displayed may be only the second remaining number of times display 269F003 displayed in an inconspicuous manner.

In a special state, a small symbol may be displayed corresponding to the first variable display. Further, the small symbol may be displayed corresponding to the second variable display in the normal state. Further, the display mode of the small symbol may be different between the normal state and the special state.

Even if the display control of the remaining number is executed again, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage is currently in the reserved storage area, and the remaining number is displayed when it is determined that there is no first reserved storage. good.

In the feature unit 269F, in a special state, the first variable display may be executed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the second variable display. Further, in the low probability / non-KT state as a normal state, both the first variable display and the second variable display may be displayed in an easily recognizable manner. An aspect in which both are easy to recognize is, for example, to display a background symbol corresponding to the first variable display and the second variable display on the screen, respectively.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can perform variable display (for example, variable display of a special symbol, decorative symbol, and background symbol) and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display) for a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result. The device 8a), the second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs the second variable display (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and the advantageous state. After the end, with a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, the remaining number display control means that can control the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003)). A microcomputer 200 for effect control is provided, and the first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8), and at least in the special state, the said The variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 48, low probability /. In the first KT state, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as a background symbol), and the remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state. At the start of the special state, the remaining number of times is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the first remaining number of times display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the low probability / first KT state, and FIG. 48 (B) is displayed. (The first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the low probability / first KT state), the remaining number is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the special state, and the subsequent variable number is displayed. The display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, the second remaining number of times display 269F003 is displayed and thereafter. The second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the variable display of the above is started), and further, a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is executed. A possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) and a title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) are provided, and the title notification means is the suggestion effect. A gaming machine capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the above (for example, FIGS. 57 (D) and 57 (F)) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed in the gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time. In addition, since the title can be notified according to the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect is improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine in which the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed and the effect of effect is improved, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine 901), a suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The title notifying means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) is provided, and the title notifying means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120). For example, FIGS. 57 (D) and 57 (F)) gaming machines. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.
(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other examples of the form will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.)
FIG. 49 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 49, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 905 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 905, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 905, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 9025A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 9025B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 905, a winning ball device 906A and a variable winning ball device 906B are provided.

The winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 906B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 9081 (see FIG. 50). The variable winning ball device 906B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 906A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 906B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 9081 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 906B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 49, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 9010 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 9010, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 906A and the variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 50), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball easily enters the big winning door. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 9010.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 9010 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 49, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

On the left side of the image display device 905, a passage gate 9041 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 9041, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 for gaming effects are provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (not shown in FIG. 49), a movable body 9032 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 9030 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 9031A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area. The stick controller 9031A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 9031A is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 50).

A push button 9031B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 9031B is detected by the push sensor 9035B (see FIG. 50).

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a stick controller 9031A and a push button 9031B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 901 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 9030. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 9041, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 906B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 906A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 906B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the opening mode similar to the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 901, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 905, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R and / or a game effect lamp 909. It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 9032, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 905, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,") which is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 905, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 905 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with, for example, a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 9015, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 9011 includes a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103. , A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

The CPU 90103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 90101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 90101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 90102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped in part or in whole. In addition, you may expand all or a part of the program stored in ROM 90101 into RAM 90102 and execute it on RAM 90 102.

The random number circuit 90104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 90103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 90105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, ordinary symbol display 9020, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) a display 9025A, a second hold display 9025B, a normal figure hold display 9025C, etc., a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 90110 is a detection signal (a game ball has passed or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 9021, start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 90111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 9081 or the solenoid 9082) from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 9082 for a big prize opening door. To transmit.

The main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) gives a production control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 9012. The effect control command output from the main board 9011 is relayed by the relay board 9015 and supplied to the effect control board 9012. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 9011 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 9032, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 9012 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123, a random number circuit 90124, and an I / O 90125.

The effect control CPU 90120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 90123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 90121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 9012, and is an effect to be executed. (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 90121 are used, and the RAM 90 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A or the push sensor 9035B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and a signal indicating the operation content as appropriate). It may also instruct the control unit 90123.

The display control unit 90123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120.

The display control unit 90123 supplies the image display device 905 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905. The display control unit 90123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 9013 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 90123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 9032 to the movable body 9032 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 9032.

The voice control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 908L and 908R, drives the speakers 908L and 908R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 908L and 908R. Let me.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 90123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 90120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 9032 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 9032, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 90124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 9011. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 9011, such as the effect control board 9012, the sound control board 9013, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 901, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 9011)
First, the main operation of the main board 9011 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 90103. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 90103 on the main board 9011.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 51, the CPU 90103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 90102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 9012 (step S909). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 905.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 90102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 90103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S905). In step S905, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 90102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 9002 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 9011 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 90103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 90102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 9012 (step S907). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 905 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 90120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 90103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special figure game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (details are provided). See below).

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 90103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 9041). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 906B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 9020, and the normal figure hold display 9025C is turned on to display the normal figure hold number.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 90103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 90103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 52 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 9012. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, by executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 52 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 9012 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 90101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 9011 and various decisions on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control board 9012, various tables are stored in the ROM 90121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 9012)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 54 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 9012. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 9032, such as control for driving the movable body 9032 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, the effect control command is taken from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9074), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or stored in the RAM 90122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 90123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S9075, the effect control process process is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 9032. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

Following the effect control process process in step S9076, the effect random number update process is executed (step S9077), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S9073. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S9073.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9076 of FIG. 54 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S90161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 9011. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 9011. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 90123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 90123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 90123 causes the image display device 905 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the display control unit 90123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 905. , Driving the movable body 9032, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013, and commanding the lamp control board 9014 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 9011 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 9011. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 9011 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 9011 to specify the end of the big hit game state. It is updated to 7 "and the production process during the big hit is completed.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 31AK)
Next, the feature portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1 ′ -1 and PA1 ′, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “loss”. -2, Display of reach loss fluctuation patterns PA2'-1 to PA2'-6, PA3'-1 to PA3'-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "loss". Fluctuation patterns PB2'-1 to PB2'-6, PB3'-1 to PB3'-4, etc., in which the result is a "big hit" are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 56 (B). Normal reach <Super reach E <Super reach D <Super reach C <Super reach B <The order is higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, a reach that is determined to be a big hit may be provided.

In this embodiment, the super reach is performed via the normal reach. In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach, a development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The fluctuation patterns PA3'-1 to PA3'-4 and the like shown in FIG. 56 (A) and the fluctuation patterns PB3'-1 to PB3'-4 and the like are fluctuation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. .. In addition, although FIG. 56 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super reach one step higher, a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability develops by two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 56 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, Super Reach E, which has the lowest reliability among Super Reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and other Super Reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively aroused and the effect of production is improved. The mode of notification of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be different depending on the actual display result and the like. In addition, the font (Gothic typeface, Mincho typeface, etc.) and typeface (line book, regular script, etc.) of the title character may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the one indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach production, the production content of the reach production, and the like.

(Example of production operation of feature unit 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 90120 executing the effect control process process based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. 57 and 58 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 57A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to enter the reach mode. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 905, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a specific period has passed since the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect (also referred to as the super reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 905 is as shown in FIG. 57 (D). The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 908. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and in the battle production, if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

When displaying the dialogue on the image display device 905 during the super reach effect, the voice corresponding to the dialogue may be output from the speaker 908. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 57 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles at the lower part of the image display device 905 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a specific period elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 57 (F). Then, the character "SP reach B") is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 908 to notify the title of super reach B. To. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 57 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a specific period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction portion of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 57 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 57 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introduction portion until the notification is made, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 57 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which super reach will be achieved after the super reach production is started and which title will be notified. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are not limited to completely sharing the production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine which Super Reach will be achieved by paying close attention to the production. The parts may be made into a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified thereafter. You may do it. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach will be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 57 (H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the character “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 905. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") from the speaker 908. In this way, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the Super Reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. Expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 57 (H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification becomes various and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 57 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 905 and the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during the reach production. Although FIG. 57 (I) shows the same effect contents as those in FIG. 57 (C) (Super Reach A, Super Reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to Super Reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. To.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 905. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to displaying the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Will be executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach production of Super Reach E, which has low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 57 (D), (F), (FIG. 57). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Even in the super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Further, contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a specific period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production is performed. The title is notified at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a specific period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach having low jackpot reliability are notified. In E, the title was notified at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be notified after a specific period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 905, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 905 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area) of. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification becomes possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 905 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the entire background is used as the background for title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be something (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach A and Super Reach B, or the display area for title notification may be different between Super Reach D and Super Reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily different according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of reach with low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is different according to the reach effect, the display area may be different or the display place may be different as in this embodiment.

(Expectation suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed, and Super Reach D having lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach A and Super Reach B is not displayed. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the sense of expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed in at least a part of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach E.

As shown in FIG. 57 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be suggested by a meter or a gauge, and corresponds to the expectation degree. The numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (H) or the like, when the number of black stars is used, half of the black stars may be displayed so that the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until the determined effect described later is executed. As a result, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. Further, by doing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of the effect.

Although the production operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when the timing for deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display) is reached, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed. The deciding effect includes a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a deciding effect indicating that the display result is "missing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58B, a determination effect is executed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 905. After that, if the display result is "big hit", the image 31AK013 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (C), and the big hit combination is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (D). A definite decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is "missing", an image showing that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach loss combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the title notification is terminated before the determined effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 905 to execute the variable display, but the reach effect is in progress. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of is arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach effect.

When the image display device 905 displays a hold display, an active display, a character that is residently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile interlocking, it is appropriately hidden during the reach effect of Super Reach in order to pay attention to the reach effect. May be. At that time, these displays may be left displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as Super Reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected by the low-reliability reach production, and it is possible to pay attention to the reach production in the high-reliability reach production.

(Development production)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. 59 (B) shows. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. After that, when developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the title of Super Reach A is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. When developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the title of Super Reach B is notified, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 59, when the reach of the development destination is the reach of performing the title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 59 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display as if it has failed) is displayed. You may do so. By making such an effect, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect. In addition, there may be a development effect of Gase, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 57 (H), the black star indicating the expectation degree was displayed from the beginning on the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but five white stars were displayed first and gradually. It is also possible to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK0221. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white stars of. At this time, a voice "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 908. As shown in FIGS. 60 (D) and 60 (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 908 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation suggestion display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted as shown in FIG. 60 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (F), black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the degree of expectation by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output depending on the number of displayed stars (the number of steps of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three and a half black stars are displayed. In addition, audio may not be output in some cases. By doing so, the expectation suggestion effect becomes various and the effect is improved. In addition, regardless of the number of steps of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed, it fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of expectation that increases. You may try to perform such an effect.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the game effect lamp 909. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command for designating a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 9011, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 908, and the like displayed on the image display device 905 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changed by the operation of the player.

FIGS. 60 (G) to 60 (L) are examples of production operation of title notification and expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (G). At this time, the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 908, but the sound different from the normal mode (for example, the sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024 in Super Reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. The production is performed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, the speaker 908 outputs a voice "pon" indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 60 (J) and 60 (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the expectation is settled in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted as shown in FIG. 60 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect of the effect is diversified by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

FIG. 60 shows an example of the effect operation when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) are shown. ) May be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the player's preference and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation degree suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that gradually reduces the number of indications suggesting. Such an expectation degree suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation degree suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect for gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a button is displayed on the image display device 905. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation to the push button 9031B is detected, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed, so that the super is displayed. The title of reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source can be switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach the development has occurred. Further, under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 9032 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. In this way, if the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and if the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 62, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

Further, when the title notice in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound may be output according to the display mode after the change in the title display mode. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that is controlled by the jackpot advantageous state and the expectation level is improved, such as the advance notice effect and the development effect. By doing so, once the title is notified, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 90120 within the variable display start setting process of step S90171 of FIG. 55. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 9011 is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001).

In the case of a fluctuation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 64 (A), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in FIG. 64 (A), the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern". Things that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In the "fruit pattern", the characters of the title may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the display area of the title may be the "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as a "fruit pattern" from the beginning. For those whose display color changes, as shown in FIG. 62, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the display period of the title differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the change timing may be determined to be one of them. Then, in the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or smaller than the number of super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 64 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 64 (B) is used in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and change timing of the display color) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed depending on the display mode (for example, the display color of the line) of the character in the reach effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character's dialogue (whether or not the dialogue notice is executed) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 64 (C), depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "missing". As shown in FIG. 64 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are provided to change from "white", "red", and "white" to "red", and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. For those whose display color changes, the display color may change after the dialogue is displayed. For those whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the timing at which the display color changes.

In addition, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a ratio different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

In addition, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), whether or not to execute the other advance notice effect and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice is given in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the unreliable super reach). And at least one of the dialogue notices may be feasible. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 64, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be different depending on the type of super reach. By doing so, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the type of reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable production modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the production becomes more diverse and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of feasible production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of feasible production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a unified notice effect, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the action effect that the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (action effect image, etc.) of the action effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or dialogue does not change even though the action effect is executed. When executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the action mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect, or the title notice and the title notice may be different. The ratio of which effect mode changes (ratio of which action) may be different from the dialogue notice, or the ratio of how many colors (steps) change may be different. .. By executing such an action effect, the player will eventually pay attention to whether the action effect image is displayed, the title or the dialogue, and the effect will be improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect and the effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on the effect mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute the action effect according to the effect mode, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one of the title and the dialogue is produced (display color) according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May change. By doing so, the player pays attention to the production content of the reach production.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above-mentioned feature unit 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the feature portions described in the above embodiment are not essential configurations and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub-display device different from the image display device 905, a sub-liquid crystal display may be provided on the game board 902 or the game machine frame 903. Although expressed as a sub liquid crystal display here, the sub display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed in the vicinity of, for example, the image display device 905, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above embodiment, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after notifying the title on the image display device 905, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display. By doing so, the title and the expectation degree suggestion display can be displayed without disturbing the super reach effect in the image display device 905, and the title and the expectation degree suggestion display become easy to understand.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (mainly the notification for displaying characters) related to other effects. You may. For example, as a advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect), in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 905, the transferred zone. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. When presenting a mission ("Reach with 7", "Use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy", etc.) and perform a mission production that will be in an advantageous state for the player when the mission is completed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification of a mission.

(Modification example 1 of the feature portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is shown (). 58 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determination effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect for prompting the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, since the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

65 and 66 are diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 65 (A), after the reach mode is set in the image display device 905, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the ally character 31AK041 and the enemy character 31AK042 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 65 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 66 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

Along with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 65C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 905. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 9031B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 changes to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be performed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. In addition, the operation effect image may change without the action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time from which the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 66 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 66 (K). , A display prompting the operation of pulling the stick controller 9031A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 9031A becomes an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 9031A is detected, the image 31AK052 showing that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 66 (M), a definite decorative symbol to be a jackpot combination is derived. If the operation is not detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 66 (L) is automatically displayed.

In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and when an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability of is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect is improved and the player's expectation is raised. Can be maintained.

Although the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, they are appropriately performed in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 65 and 66. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (presence / absence of operation effect, operation effect image to be displayed, presence / absence of action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 31AK)
A suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state may be performed. For example, the shutter effect of performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect of performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title production, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice of the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in each of the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include each element E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title in red characters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title are displayed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 908 notifies the speaker to output a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 909 emits light to notify the player. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 909 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 67 is a display screen view when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 67A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 905. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 67 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is reached as shown in FIG. 67 (c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. The reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as the reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed, and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of emitting a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability such as "hot" is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title production, by outputting a specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the output periods of the common sound and the specific sound are completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 67 (e) is executed. Enemy characters are displayed on the left side of the screen, and ally characters are displayed on the right side of the screen. When a ally character wins a battle with an enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is notified that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number pattern. As shown in FIG. 67 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 67A and 67D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 include all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image and are displayed. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 67 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 67 (d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 67 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is a specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 63 together with the decision related to the shutter effect.

(Explanation of feature 150IW)
Next, the feature unit 150IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 68-1 and 68-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into an outer frame 150IW001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board constituting the gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 902 (see FIG. 49) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 150IW003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 150IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 150IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 150IW003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position where the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 150IW003a, and when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 150IW003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 150IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 9011 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a state of being housed in a board case 150IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a setting key 150IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 150IW051, is housed in the board case 150IW201 together with the main board 9011, and the setting key 150IW051 does not open the board case 150IW201. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side of the substrate case 150IW201 so that the board case 150IW201 can be operated.

Since the board case 150IW201 having the setting key 150IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 using the door key of. Further, since the setting key 150IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the store clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 150IW051. The setting key 150IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 150IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, the board case 150IW201 is provided with a display monitor 150IW029 and a display changeover switch 150IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 150IW029. The display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are connected to the main board 9011 and are arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 150IW201. That is, the display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are arranged in front of the main board 9011 in the board case 150IW201. Since the main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 9011 is the back side of the gaming board 902 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 9011 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 150IW051 in the feature unit 150IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. There is a risk that the setting key 150IW051 will be operated from the inside of the game island to be installed. Therefore, in the feature unit 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 68-2 and 68-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a is the right end portion of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. A security cover 150IW500A that covers the back side is attached. The curity cover 150IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 150IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 150IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 150IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. , It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 150IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 150IW201. Further, the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 150IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 68-2, the long piece 150IW500Ab abuts (or is close to) the right portion of the board case 150IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Thereby, the right side portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Therefore, the setting key 150IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 150IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68-3, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the setting key 150IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and separates from the long piece 150IW500Ab. When the covering state of 150IW500Ab is released, it becomes an operable state.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the feature unit 150IW is maintained in a regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 150IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted.

Since the board case 150IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. Unless the pachinko / pachislot machine frame 150IW003 is opened by the door key or the like, the setting key 150IW051 cannot be operated to change the set value.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901. A setting key 150IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the machines and the pachinko gaming machine 901. Since there is a possibility that the setting value may be changed by operating the pachinko / pachislot machine frame 150IW003, the security cover 150IW500A restricts the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 while the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By maintaining the regulated state, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a restricted state in which the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed and the back right side of the board case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500A, the board case 150IW201 is housed in the board case 150IW201 through the transparent security cover 150IW500A. Since the main board 9011 and the like can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 9011 on which electronic components such as the CPU 90103 are mounted, the sealing seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101, and by using the RAM 90102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are executed. Further, the CPU 90103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by executing the random number generation program.

In this feature unit 150IW, on the side of the main board 9011, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in CPU 90103, or may be updated by random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 90100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 90100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 68-4 and 68-5, which are prepared by the CPU 90103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 90101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 90103 to output various control signals from the main board 9011, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 90101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 68-4 (A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 68-4 (B), and FIG. 68. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C) and the big hit type judgment table shown in FIG. 68-5 (A), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown) and the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 68-6, a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 in the feature unit 150IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3 to increase the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of 2 or 3, the higher the advantage is. In this feature unit 150IW, the winning probability of a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 68-4 (A) to 68-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 68-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. You are supposed to win the prize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 68-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) than the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to do. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/280 for non-probability change, 1/28 for probability change). do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display, and the set value. The small hit is won with the same probability (1/2) as when is "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 68-4 (A) to (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 68-4 (A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 68-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B is used. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but stop at the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 68-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" is designed to be 1 / 93.75. The winning probability of a small hit at the set value "3" may be set to 1 / 87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine without a small hit, the configuration shown by the feature unit 150IW may be applied.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 68-4 (A) to (C). A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is made depending on whether the first special symbol is variable display or the second special symbol variable display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. A common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using a separate table for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the case where the advantage is higher in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3" is shown. May be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 68-4, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is easily obtained. In a specific gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example), unlike other gaming states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). The value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, the same probability change is applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variation display of a predetermined number of times (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of ends, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of the set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3".

In the feature unit 150IW, a total of three setting values of 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in 901 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 68-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 90101. In the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed). A common jackpot type determination table is used when determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning in the second start winning slot (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. A table referenced to determine one.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 68-5 (A), the determination values corresponding to the random numbers (MR2) for determining the jackpot type are assigned to each set value, but they are assigned to simplify the explanation. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. That is, the ratio of which of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C is determined for each set value is shown. The loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-7, which will be described later, are also actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. To simplify, the percentage of assigned determination values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 68-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2". When the rate determined for the jackpot type B is high and the set value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the rate determined for the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 150IW will be described with reference to FIG. 68-5 (B). In the feature unit 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been done.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening preprocessing of step S90114 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 9012 side, the start of the jackpot gaming state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect effect to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the effect control board 9012 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end process of step S90117 is executed on the main board 9011 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed on the effect control board 9012 side. It is a period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 68-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, then the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of being determined to be the jackpot type A is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling can be achieved. Can be prevented from becoming too high.

This feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a jackpot game, and this jackpot suggestion effect is used for a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot can be hit. When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, interval period and ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A <B <C is used. This makes it possible to increase the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

In the feature unit 150IW, in any of the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are characterized by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 150IW). The game ends when the figure game is executed or when the game is in a big hit game state before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time reduction control and probability variation control is different for each big hit type. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the ratio of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability change continues for each set value. The rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different.

Further, in this feature unit 150IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and the probability change control, the number of controls, etc.) between the big hit type A to the big hit type C, and the fanfare period and the interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different. You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

It should be noted that the feature unit 150IW exemplifies a form in which the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined at a different ratio from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value set, one of the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. Includes determining by percentage.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different depending on the jackpot type is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in this feature unit 150IW, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result becomes a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

In the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determination.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability and the small hit probability increase, and the jackpot type C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 150IW exemplifies a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the game playability itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 1, the game property (so-called probabilistic loop type) in which the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probabilistic state is 65% is set. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the rate at which the game ball passes through the count switch during the big hit game differs depending on the type of big hit. When the property (so-called V probability variation type) is set and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the high base is medium (time reduction control). In (middle), the game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) may be used in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. Further, although the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are the same as those set in 1 to 3, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 4) may be provided.

Further, in this way, when the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 is passed through the effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time, and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 is used as a game switch (game ball). It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a probabilistic state or a jackpot gaming state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 68-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 90101. As shown in FIGS. 68-5 (C), the feature unit 150IW is provided with small hit types A to C as small hit types. As shown in FIGS. 68-5 (C), in the feature unit 150IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the opening period and the number of opening times of the large winning opening during the small hit game are the same regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 90101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is predetermined to set the fluctuation display result to "big hit" and the fluctuation display result to be "small hit". The small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table used when is pre-determined and the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is pre-determined to make the fluctuation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 68-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 150IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to the execution of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and other periods (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period). Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use different loss fluctuation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, in the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 68-6 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In the feature unit 150IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power to the time when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example) is set as a special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, a special period may be set by using a real-time clock or the like as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). In addition, the period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period.

In the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 68-6 (A) and (B), normal reach loss and super reach loss are obtained in the order of set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach and super reach.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-6 (A) has a higher rate of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-6 (B), and is a set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them becomes large. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motive for playing the game in the special period is Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

For example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern among them) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do so. By doing so, the execution rate differs only for a specific fluctuation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific fluctuation pattern is executed. become. On the contrary, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 68-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss, depending on the set value, at times other than non-reach loss. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach loss increases remarkably in the order of set values "1" <"2" <" 3" (this example). Then, it increases by 5%). Specifically, in the second loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-6 (B), the normal reach loss is in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". It is configured so that the ratio of is slightly higher (in this example, it is increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In this feature unit 150IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this depends on the execution ratio of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss as a whole depending on the set value. It is a concept that includes that the execution ratios of normal reach loss and super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different depending on the set value.

The feature unit 150IW displays a common background image on the image display device 905 regardless of which of the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 68-6 (A) and 68-6 (B) is used. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the set value is set to any of 1 to 3, the image display device 905 displays a common background image and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. It should be noted that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment during the special period or the period from the time when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined time (30 times in this example).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature unit 150IW. (Selected only in) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 68-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table. In this feature unit 150IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be one of non-reach loss A to C. It is configured in. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68-6 may include non-reach loss A to C, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss. It may be configured to determine.

As shown in FIG. 68-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the ratio of being determined to non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is "2". When the value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio determined to non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Judgment value is assigned to.

In the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit increases in the order of "1" <"2" <" 3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of "<" 2 "<" 3 ". With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

The feature unit 150IW is configured to have different average fluctuation times by differentiating the ratio of non-reach loss A to C having different fluctuation times depending on the set value. For example, non-reach loss A to C. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided so that the fluctuation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different depending on the set value. When multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, the time of the decorative pattern shaking display and the high-speed fluctuation display may be different to produce the effect. It is desirable that there is no difference in the appearance.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final) is set according to the set value. The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the period during which the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. , It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of which of the non-reach loss A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the jackpot is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration. Is fixedly set, and the setting in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is high may make the fluctuation time longer.

The feature unit 150IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening the variation time as compared with other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds), which is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds), is provided. The variation pattern for shortening is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is the purpose. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 150IW, the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the variation time may be different depending on the set value for the variation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number or more.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 68-8 to 68-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 150IW. In the feature unit 150IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S902 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 90103 waits for the effect control means to start for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 90120) starts when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. Set the timer (step 150IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time is set in the effect control means activation waiting timer from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 90120. Next, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 150IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 150IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step 150IWS004 and the processes of steps 150IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 150IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 150IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 90120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are sent before the effect control CPU 90120 is started, and the command may be missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 90103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch was pressed when the power was turned on to the gaming machine (step 150IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power cutoff process (see step 150IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is once cleared by step 150IWS006 when the power is turned on to the game machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, a case is shown in which a RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 150IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power cutoff process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. May be good.

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S904 (step 150IWS007). Specifically, in step 150IWS007, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS007; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S905, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 150IWS008). In step 150IWS008, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data of the RAM 90102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step 150IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step 150IWS008; Yes), the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3". (Step 150IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any of the set values "1" to "3", the process proceeds to step 150IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (N in step 150IWS008) or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 150IWS009). The CPU 90103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any of the set values "1" to "3" (N in step 150IWS009), the CPU 90103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed is set (step 150IWS011). If the setting changing flag is set (step 150IWS011; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the change of the setting value and the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

In step 150IWS012, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS012). If the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS013). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 90103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 150IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear process includes a RAM clear 1 process (see step 150IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 process (see step 150IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 90103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 90102 is cleared, and the connection ratio and the connection ratio are cleared. Information for performance display such as role ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 90103 performs a process of clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 90102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 90102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is cleared. Information is not cleared and is retained. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 90103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS016), and proceeds to step 150IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is off (N in step 150IWS012), when the setting key 150IW051 is off (N in step 150IWS013), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 150IWS013). In step 150IWS014 N), the CPU 90103 controls to transmit a set value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS017).

Next, the CPU 90103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 150IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 90103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 150IWS018). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 90103 shifts to step 150IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 150IWS019). For example, the CPU 90103 controls the display monitor 150IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred. Further, the CPU 90103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 150IWS020). Then, the processes after step 150IWS018 are repeatedly executed.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS007 to S020, in the feature unit 150IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 150IWS007, S008, Y in step 150IWS009), a power failure occurs during the setting change, and the like. In the case (Y of step 150IWS011), the RAM is cleared on the condition that the setting key 150IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, and the set value after step 150IWS025. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened and the setting key 150IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the gaming control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 150IWS011; No), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 90103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processes of step 150IWS022 and step 150IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first detected to be turned on when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. After that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes to check whether the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. However, by checking whether the RAM clear flag is set or not, instead of checking the status of the clear switch directly, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is detected when the power is turned on. (See steps 150IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS023). If the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS024). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 90103 controls to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation process for confirming the set value is executed to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 controls to send a setting change command indicating that the setting change process for changing the setting value is executed to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 150IWS028). If the RAM error flag is set (that is, if an error in the RAM 90102 is detected), the CPU 90103 fills the set value confirmation buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 90102 for storing the current set value). Set to the set value "1" (step 150IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030. At this time, the CPU 90103 resets the RAM error flag.

When the effect control board 9012 side receives the setting confirmation command or the setting change command, it controls to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image on the image display device 905). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 9031B is pressed on the effect control board 9012 side, "maintenance mode" or the like may be displayed and the mode may be changed to the maintenance mode. "Maintenance mode" is, for example, real-time clock date and time setting, error occurrence history (recording when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when the set value was changed or after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of the set value). When the setting key 150IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 90103 executes a 4 ms weight process for measuring a 4 ms weight time (step 150IWS030). Then, when the weight time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 90103 shifts to step 150IWS031 and executes the power cutoff process (step 150IWS031). In the power cutoff process of step 150IWS031, the CPU 90103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power cutoff signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on). The power supply cutoff signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power off processing, when the CPU 90103 detects that the power off signal is output, it executes a power supply stop processing for storing necessary data (for example, a backup flag, a checksum) in the backup RAM area. do.

Next, the CPU 90103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS032). Further, the CPU 90103 controls to externally output a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via an external terminal board (step 150IWS033).

Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 150IWS043 as it is.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 sets the setting changing flag (step 150IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial set flag indicating that the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the power of the gaming machine is turned on is set (step 150IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 90102 and is a buffer for setting an input state (whether it is an on state or an off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the gaming machine is turned on), the process proceeds to step 150IWS039 as it is.

If the initially set flag is not set (that is, if the value has never been set in the clear switch buffer since the gaming machine was turned on), the CPU 90103 puts the clear switch buffer on. The indicated value (eg, "1") is set (step 150IWS037). Further, the CPU 90103 sets the initial set flag (step 150IWS038).

Next, the CPU 90103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 150IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 90102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is on or off) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the previous clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set if the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set if the clear switch is in the off state.

Next, the CPU 90103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 150IWS040). Next, in the CPU 90103, the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state (for example, "0"), and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 150IWS041).

If the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is in the off state and the value set in the clear switch buffer is in the on state, the CPU 90103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. It is displayed and stored in the set value confirmation buffer (updated and stored for the already stored set value) (step 150IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as a set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display of the display monitor 150IW029 is updated and displayed to "2", and the set value "2" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display of the display monitor 150IW029 is updated and displayed to "3", and the set value "3" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display of the display monitor 150IW029 is updated and displayed to "1", and the set value "1" is stored in the set value confirmation buffer.

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS043). If the setting key 150IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030, the processes of steps 150IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 150IW051 is turned off, the CPU 90103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 150IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) by executing the above steps 150IWS025 to S043 (steps 150IWS025, S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 150IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (Y in steps 150IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 150IWS027). At the same time, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 150IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 150IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 150IWS033. , The security information timer is set in step 150IWS044, and the information output process (step S9023) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, by executing the process of step 150IWS020, the security signal is output externally even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs. In this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is reset.

Next, the CPU 90103 resets the setting changing flag (step 150IWS045). Further, the CPU 90103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS046). Further, the CPU 90103 controls to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 90120 (step 150IWS047).

Next, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 150IWS049. The processing of steps 150IWS049 and S050 in the feature unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S906 and S907 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 90103 executes the RAM clear 1 process and performs the process of clearing the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102 (150IWS051). The processing of steps 150IWS052 to S055 in the feature unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S909 to S9012 shown in FIG.

FIG. 68-11 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 150IW, as shown in FIG. 68-11, when the setting key 150IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door open sensor 150IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 150IWS035 to S042) are executed, and the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is executed, and the recovery process (step 150IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 150IW051 is off when the power is turned on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed if the clear switch is on, and if the clear switch is off, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed. Only the recovery process (step 150IWS049) is executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 68-12 (A) and 68-12 (B), when the power is turned off (power cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 ends. If the large winning opening is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing when the power is turned off, the large winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 9082.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68-12 (C), when the store clerk of the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 150IW051 is turned on. The setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 90103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029.

As shown in FIG. 68-12 (D), in the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029, the CPU 90103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the clerk of the amusement park or the like in the setting change process. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ... Every time the clear switch is operated). Further, the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 90102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68-12 (E), the CPU 90103 turns off the display monitor 150IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 150IW051 is turned off by the operation of a store clerk or the like of the game hall, thereby turning off the display monitor 150IW029. Notify the clerk or the like that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102.

If the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 68-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 90103 ends the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a variable display result, a big hit type, a lottery for determining a variable pattern, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 150IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 90102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 150IW) or the most advantageous to the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 150 IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 68-12, the case where the set value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 150IW029 when the set value is confirmed or changed is shown. The set value may be displayed by using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 150IW029, for example. Further, for example, the display monitor 150IW029 may be configured to display the set value by performing a dedicated 4-digit display. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 displays "-S-2". The 4-digit display of "-S-3" may be performed on the display monitor 150IW029 if the set value is "3". Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays the four digits of "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 displays the four digits of "2222". You may.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S90110) in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 68-13 and 68-14 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S90110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 90103 confirms the value of the total reserved storage number (total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 150IWS101). For example, check the count value of the total pending storage counter for counting the total pending storage.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 90103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 150IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 90103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). The data indicating "second" is set in (step 150IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 90103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 150IWS104).

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS102 to S104, in the feature unit 150IW, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. And may be configured to execute.

Next, the CPU 90103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 90102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 90103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 90103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 90102.

Then, the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 150IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 90103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 90103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 90102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 90102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 90103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is decremented by 1 (step 150IWS107). The CPU 90103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

Next, the CPU 90103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 90102 to the effect control board 9012 (step 150IWS108). As described above, in the feature unit 150IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of turning on the power by executing the processing of step 150IWS047. By executing the process of 150IWS108, the set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS108, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send commands. For example, in step 150IWS047, a command for directly specifying a set value (for example, commands 9E01 (H) to 9E03 (H) according to the set values "1" to "3") is transmitted, while in step 150IWS108, the set value is set. A identifiable variation pattern command may be transmitted, and the variation pattern commands may be configured to be prepared for the number of set values (for example, for the setting value "1", commands 1C00 (H) to are prepared as variation pattern commands. , The setting value "2" may be configured to prepare commands 2C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands, and the setting value "3" may be configured to prepare commands 3C00 (H) or more as fluctuation pattern commands.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, even if the same variation pattern is used, if a different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value, the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example). ) Minute fluctuation pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern command corresponding to the set value. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is sent only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values. May be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the same setting value command is transmitted by the setting value command (see step 150IWS047) transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the setting value command (see step 150IWS108) transmitted at the start of fluctuation is shown. It is not limited to any mode. For example, the setting value command for turning on the power and the setting value command for starting the fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different setting value commands may be sent at the time of turning on the power and at the starting of the fluctuation. good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to send the effect control command that is used as both the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. May be good. In this case, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern command specifies the same fluctuation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", the fluctuation pattern command A-1 is transmitted. The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 90120 side is configured depending on which set value is used. It may be configured so that which fluctuation pattern is selected and the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. It may be selected by the ratio, or if the set value is 3, the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected or the fluctuation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the fluctuation patterns A-1 to A-3 may be configured so that the fluctuation time is the same, but the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not received normally, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not received normally, the dedicated selection ratio is selected. It may be configured to select a fluctuation pattern with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 90103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 9012 according to the current gaming state (step 150IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 controls to send a probabilistic state background designation command when it is in a probabilistic state, and controls to send a time saving state background designation command when it is in a time saving state, which is a normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background specification command.

Next, the CPU 90103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 68-4) with a random number value MR1, and if they match, a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit is performed. It is a program to be executed. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 150IWS110), the CPU 90103 performs a small hit determination process (step 150IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 150IWS111), the CPU 90103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 150IWS112), and proceeds to step 150IWS116.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step 150IWS111), that is, if the value is out of the range, the process proceeds to step 150IWS116 as it is.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 150IWS110), the CPU 90103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 90103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 68-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "Big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 150IWS114).

Further, the CPU 90103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 90102 (step 150IWS115). For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 90103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 150IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an outlier symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the jackpot flag is set, "7", which is the jackpot symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, it may be determined to be a different special symbol stop symbol depending on the jackpot type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 90103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90111) (step 150IWS117).

(Production mode change process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the feature unit 150IW will be described. FIG. 68-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main process in the feature unit 150IW. In the feature unit 150IW, in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect mode change process (step 150IWS201) to change the effect mode when the effect control random number update process of step S9077 is executed, and then the effect mode change process is executed (step 150IWS201). The process returns to step S9073.

The feature unit 150IW can control three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 905 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the advance notice and reach effects are different. In the effect mode change process of step 150IWS201, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 9012, the effect mode may be changed based on the predetermined date and time based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 150IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 90120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode A is changed, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to the effect mode C, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → ... It may be changed at random from modes A to C.

(Command analysis processing)

68-16 and 68-17 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S9075). The effect control command received from the main board 9011 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 150IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 150IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 150IWS303). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 150IWS304), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 90122 (step). 150IWS305). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 150IWS306).

Since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by the power supply in the feature unit 150IW, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area supply power to the gaming machine. Is cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122, and the process is started with the set value command reception flag cleared. To. Since the effect control board 9012 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. It may be configured so that the set value command is always sent when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this feature unit 150IW, the set value command is sent when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed, but the set value command is normal due to missing commands or garbled data. If the data cannot be received, the process of step 150IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this feature unit 150IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each fluctuation display, so that the process of step 150IWS305 is performed based on the set value command received thereafter. It is executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when reading the setting value command on the effect control CPU 90120 side, the setting value command is used. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any of "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. If so, it may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then when a new set value command is received, the newly received set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the set value stored last time, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and it may be determined that the setting value is abnormal. Even if it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been received normally, and the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown by the feature unit 150IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial roll setting)
In the feature unit 150IW, when either the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received from the main board 9011 in the command analysis process on the effect control board 9012 side, the image display device 905 gives a predetermined initial result. (Specifically, a combination of decorative symbols, which is displayed on the image display device 905 until the first variation display is started) is controlled (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial appearance effect).

If the received effect control command is an initialization designation command or a recovery command (step 150IWS307), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122. Based on the set value, the initial roll determination table is used to combine an even initial roll (for example, "246" or "224"), which is a combination of even decorative symbols, and an odd number of decorative symbols. It is determined to be one of an odd initial roll (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial roll which is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 150IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

FIG. 68-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table. In step 150IWS309, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area by using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 68-18 (A). Determine the outcome. In the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 68-18 (A), the ratio of odd initial rolls determined is higher in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Therefore, if the odd initial roll is displayed on the image display device 905 before the start of the game, the setting value is advantageous as compared with the case where the setting has been changed and the even initial roll is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 68-18 (A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 905 before the start of the game, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150 IWS310). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the initial roll using the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 68-18 (A) assuming that the set value is "1" (step 150IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS310 to S311, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. The initial roll is determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 68-18 (A), for the set value "1", the ratio determined to be an odd initial result is the lowest, and it may not be determined to be a special initial result. By configuring in such a way, it is possible to reduce the situation where the odd initial roll or the special initial roll is displayed and the player is disappointed even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the initial result using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

FIG. 68-18 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial roll determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 68-18 (B), in the initial roll determination table for the effect mode C, an odd initial roll is determined as compared with the case of the setting value “3” which is most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and it may not be determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS312 to S313, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the odd-numbered initial rolls and special initial rolls are displayed to reduce the situation in which the player is disappointed by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display the initial result determined in steps 150IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 150IWS314).

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the initial result to be an even initial number, and the image display device 905. In, control is performed to display even initial rolls (step 150IWS315).

By executing the process of step 150IWS315, the feature unit 150IW uniformly displays an even initial result when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the situation where an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed to disappoint the player even though an unfavorable setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial number of symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the determination ratio of the odd initial roll symbol is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial roll determination table shown in FIG. 68-18 (A), the initial roll is used. It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the even initial result is uniformly displayed when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode B is set is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the setting value command cannot be received normally, such as the combination of the symbols of "???" as the initial result in the effect mode B. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a set value in some form may be displayed as an initial result.

In addition, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 150IWS308, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. May be good.

If the received effect control command is a set value abnormality error command (step 150IWS316), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the set value abnormality error notification (step 150IWS317). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a character display such as "a setting value abnormality error has occurred" on the image display device 905, or sounds a voice or an error sound indicating a setting value abnormality error from the speakers 908L and 908R. It controls to output and to make the game effect lamp 909 and the LED emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error notification is performed, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909 and the LED are emitted with the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In that case, it is desirable to make it emit light in white.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command for specifying the variation pattern) (step 150IWS320), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received variation pattern command in the RAM. Store in the area (step 150IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (effect control command that specifies whether to make a big hit or not, a big hit type, and a small hit type) (step 150IWS323), for effect control. The CPU 90120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 150IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (effect control command that specifies that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed) (step 150IWS325), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step 150IWS325). Step 150 IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of the jackpot game) (step 150IWS327), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 150IWS328).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 150IWS329), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 150IWS330).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 150IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS 301.

The feature unit 150IW is configured so that the odd initial roll is not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on. However, even if the odd initial roll can be displayed. good. Further, also in this case, the ratio determined by the odd initial number may be different depending on the set value (that is, the setting value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial roll or an even initial roll, an initial roll that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied and is set. (It is determined that the value is 2 or the set value 3), an initial result that is determined to be a specific set value, or the like may be provided so as to be displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the specific initial result, and the set value 2 or It will be confirmed that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting a specific initial roll to be determined only in the case of the set value 3, when the specific initial roll is displayed, it is confirmed that the set value is 3. .. Further, at the time of determining the initial roll, one of these initial rolls may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the feature unit 150IW, the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and the game (for example, during the game). , The setting suggestion based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tendency, and the jackpot suggestion effect executed during the jackpot (for example, during the jackpot game) can be executed. Has been done. In the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes in which the reliability of the suggestion is different. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestion effect> in-game suggestion effect> jackpot suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game, or the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be set to be configurable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect or the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution ratio. It may be possible to change the setting so as to lower (or raise). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 9031B or the operation means (operable only by the administrator) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. May be able to change.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 68-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the end of the effect waiting demo effect if it is being executed (step 150IWS502, step 150IWS503), and the image display device 905. Control is performed to end the display of the displayed puzzle display (step 150IWS504). The puzzle display is started by executing the process of step 150IWS518 described later.

Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is reset (step 150IWS505), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 150IWS506), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the time measuring result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demo effect is being executed (N in step 150IWS507). (Step 150IWS508). In step 150IWS508, for example, when the timer set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ends (for example, set in 30 seconds) times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Further, even when the timer is not set (that is, when the fluctuation display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when a predetermined period has elapsed without executing the variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the big hit game state), or when the game has not started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demo effect is produced by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the timing result by the timing means meets a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 150IWS509). That is, in step 150IWS509, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS510). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the mode of the effect when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed (step 150IWS511). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS516.

In the feature unit 150IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demo effect that is controlled and includes the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. The decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color) when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the including aspect is executed.

FIG. 68-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 150IWS511, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 68-20 (A). Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the mode of the effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 68-20 (A), determination values are assigned so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Has been done. Further, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that the pre-game suggestion effect is set to an advantageous setting value by being executed by the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting was changed when the power was turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 68-20 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, it is confirmed that the setting has been changed and that the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS512). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 assumes that the set value is "1", and whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 68-20 (A). And the production mode is determined (step 150IWS513). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS516.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS512 to S513, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIG. 68-20 (A), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode is the lowest, and the third effect mode may not be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS514). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS516.

FIG. 68-20 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 68-20 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestion effect as compared with the case of the set values "2" and "3". The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode may not be determined.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS514 to S515, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be prevented.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 150IWS511, S513, S515 (step 150IWS516). Then, the process proceeds to step 150 IWS518.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the step 150 IWS517 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 150IWS514, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 68-20 (A), before the game is used. It may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of suggestive effect.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 68-20 (A), only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed so that the execution ratio differs depending on the set value. You may do it.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect can be executed at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and first) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

The feature unit 150IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect if the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, it may be possible to execute the pre-game suggestion effect even when the setting has not been changed. In this case, it may be possible to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at different ratios depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 68-20 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 68-20 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 68-20 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change is made. When it is not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is also smaller. By doing so, it is possible to make the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect different depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 90120 controls to execute a customer waiting demo effect including execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 150IWS517). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 150 IWS517 is executed, for example, in the image display device 905, the execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (in-game suggestion effect or jackpot suggestion effect), the execution content (execution mode), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 150IWS517 is executed, the customer waiting de effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the operation is performed. The image display device 905 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the number of executions and the execution contents (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial roll effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect, etc.) are shown. It may be possible to store the information and execute an effect of estimating the set value from the information and notifying the information. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 150IWS509 to 150IWS516. Further, the process of step 150IWS517 shows the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect during the customer waiting demo effect, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the start of the game, to give an motivation to play the game from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance the interest. .. Not limited to the example of the feature unit 150IW, for example, a real-time clock or the like is used so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). May be good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include the information regarding the suggestion effect during the game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the number of executions and the execution contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code including the execution history information at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. Further, when the player takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and sends it to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of granting a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the player may access the Web server (or analyze the two-dimensional code) using the mobile terminal to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal so that the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting value is displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image suggesting the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to start displaying the puzzle display based on the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter (step 150IWS518).

In this example, a puzzle effect may be executed in which the pieces of the jigsaw puzzle are gradually aligned during the variable display of the decorative pattern. When the puzzle effect is executed, each time the puzzle effect is executed, an effect is executed in which one of the pieces of puzzle 1 to puzzle 3 is aligned one by one. Then, after the puzzle production is executed a plurality of times, it is suggested that the set value is "1" when the puzzle 1 is finally completed with all the pieces, and the set value is set when the puzzle 2 is completed with all the pieces. It is suggested that it is "2", and when all the pieces of puzzle 3 are completed, it is suggested that the set value is "3".

Also, in this example, the puzzle is not always displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern each time, but only the variable display determined to execute the puzzle effect (that is, the variable display in which the pieces of any of the puzzles increase). Only) The puzzle is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed and the customer waiting demonstration display is being displayed, the process of step 150IWS518 is executed, so that the puzzle display is displayed on the image display device 905 and the puzzle 1 is displayed. It is possible to check the gathered state of each of the pieces of ~ 3.

The first piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces collected in puzzle 1. The second piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces collected in the puzzle 2. The third piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces collected in the puzzle 3. In this example, since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by the power supply, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped for the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter stored in the RAM 90122. It is assumed that the value of the first piece counter to the third piece counter is 0 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine.

In step 150IWS518, an image of puzzle 1 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the first piece counter is collected is displayed, and an image of puzzle 2 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the second piece counter is collected is displayed. The puzzle display is displayed by displaying the image of the puzzle 3 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the third piece counter is collected.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 68-21 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S90171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 55. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 150IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 150IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 150IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 150IWS602 by the effect control CPU 90120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 90120 stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 150IWS602, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 150IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. Further, for example, when the received display result specification command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols having the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. do.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 90120 determines a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol according to the small hit type specified by the display result designation command. .. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90120 has a chance symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 150IWS602. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined.

The effect control CPU 90120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (step 150IWS603). In this example, since the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by power supply, the value of the fluctuation number counter stored in the RAM 90122 is cleared when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the game is played. When the power is turned on to the machine, it shall start from the state where the value of the fluctuation count counter is 0.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an in-game suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS604).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a puzzle effect setting process for setting the presence / absence of the puzzle effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS605).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the in-game suggestion effect or puzzle effect if the execution of the in-game suggestion effect or puzzle effect is determined (step 150IWS606). .. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 150IWS607).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 905 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 905 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variable mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used to execute the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, when the execution of the in-game suggestion effect is determined in the in-game suggestion effect determination process of step 150IWS604, the process table including the in-game suggestion effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 is selected according to the selected process table. And by executing the variable display during effect process (step S90172), the in-game suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

When the execution of the puzzle effect is determined in the puzzle effect setting process of step 150IWS605, the process table including the puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process are performed according to the selected process table. By executing (step S90172), the puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 serves as an effect device (image display device 905 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 908L, 908R as production parts) is executed (step 150IWS608).

In the feature unit 150IW, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 90120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 150IWS609). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 150IWS610), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Suggestion production decision processing during the game)
FIG. 68-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the suggestion effect determination process (step 150IWS604) during the game. The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S90171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 90120 is in the special period (Y in step 150IWS701), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS702), and the effect is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 150IWS701), the suggestion effect determination table during the second game is selected (step 150IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm whether or not the special period is in progress in step 150IWS701.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed (step 150IWS705).

FIG. 68-23 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestion effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 68-23 (B) is a second in-game suggestion effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 68-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the game.

Further, regarding the second effect mode (appearance of mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of mini character A). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that. That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 68-23 (A) and 68-23 (B), the highly reliable in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68-23 (A) and 68-23 (B), the third effect mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the game according to the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS706). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 150 IWS707).

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS706 to S707, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 68-23 (A) and 68-23 (B), for the set value "1", the ratio of determining to execute the suggestion effect during the game is low, and the ratio determined to be the second effect mode is low. Is the lowest, and it may not be determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and the player is disappointed. However, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS709).

FIG. 68-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 68-23 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the set value “3”. , It may not be determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS708 to S709, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of this, the situation in which the suggestion effect during the game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect is restricted not to be executed during the game.

By executing the process of step 150IWS708, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect is executed during the game and disappoint the player even though the disadvantageous setting value is set, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the game may be enabled to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 68-23 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 68-23 (A) and 68-23 (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, it is set when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by preventing the determination of the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode). The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and it is confirmed that the value is the set value 2 or the set value 3. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific setting value. For example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only in the case of the set value 3. It will be confirmed that the set value is 3.

In this feature unit 150IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect during the game at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the suggestion effect during the game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including 3 effect modes) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode are different depending on the set value, and only a specific effect mode is set according to the set value. It is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that the feature unit 150IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during the game of a common mode (for example, the first effect mode) in the special period and the non-special period, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. , Different aspects of the suggestion effect during the game may be feasible. For example, the size, color, and the like of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, the feature unit 150IW is configured so that whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game and the effect mode when the suggestion effect is executed are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-continuous effect, the type of pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are big hits. Depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the game, the effect mode when the effect is executed may be different.

For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be executed only when the variation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation pattern). Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the super reach B and the fluctuation pattern including the super reach A having a higher expectation than the super reach B, the latter is more likely to execute the suggestion effect during the game. However, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestion effect is executed is high. It may be made higher.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern including the pseudo-ream effect and the variation pattern not including the pseudo-ream effect (or the number of pseudo-reams is smaller than that of the former), the former has a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game. It may be set to be high, or the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be high, or the ratio when the suggestion effect during the game is executed is high and when it is executed. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game, or the game. The reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high, or the ratio of the suggestion effect during the game being executed may be high, and the reliability when the middle suggestion effect is executed may be high. ..

(Puzzle production setting process)
68-24 and 68-25 are flowcharts showing an example of the puzzle effect setting process (step 150IWS605). In the puzzle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not the puzzle completion flag indicating that any of the puzzles 1 to 3 has been completed is set (step 150IWS801). If the puzzle completion flag is set, the puzzle effect setting process ends.

By executing the process of step 150IWS801, in this example, the puzzle effect may be executed from the power-on of the gaming machine to the completion of any of the puzzles 1 to 3, and the puzzles 1 to 3 may be executed. When any one of the puzzles is completed, the puzzle effect is not executed thereafter (that is, only one of the puzzles is completed, and two or more puzzles are not completed).

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, it may be configured so that two or more puzzles may be completed.

If the puzzle completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the puzzle effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute the puzzle effect, and executes the puzzle effect. Whether or not it is determined (step 150IWS802). FIG. 68-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the puzzle production determination table. As shown in FIGS. 68-26, in this example, it is determined that the puzzle effect is executed with a probability of 1% when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

Generally, in a game store, when a game is continuously played between the time the game store opens and the time the game store closes, it is possible to execute a variable display of a decorative pattern up to about 3000 times (however, the game machine). There are differences depending on the model). In this example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces each, and when any one of puzzles 1 to 3 has up to 5 pieces, the puzzle is completed. In this example, even if the puzzles do not have all the pieces, the judgment values are assigned so that it is easy to arrange 3 to 4 pieces, so by the time any of the puzzles 1 to 3 is completed. It takes about 11 to 13 times to execute the puzzle effect, and since the determination ratio of the puzzle effect execution is 1%, it takes about 1100 to 1300 times to display the variation of the decorative pattern. Therefore, in this example, after the game store opens, one of the puzzles is designed to be completed in about the afternoon. Not limited to such an aspect, the puzzle may be completed in the morning.

In this example, the case where one kind of puzzle production determination table shown in FIGS. 68-26 is used is shown, but it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, different puzzle effect determination tables may be used according to the time zone, the number of times the variable display is executed, and the setting by the game clerk so that the execution rate of the puzzle effect changes.

Further, in this example, the case where the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces each is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, 3 pieces, 4 pieces, or 6 pieces or more. It may be configured to be present. Further, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 1 is 4 pieces, while the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 3 is 5. , The maximum number of pieces may be different for each puzzle.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the puzzle effect (step 150IWS803). If it is decided not to execute the puzzle effect, the puzzle effect setting process is terminated as it is. When it is decided to execute the puzzle effect, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is 1000 or less (step 150IWS804). If the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (that is, if the number of executions of the variation display of the decorative symbol from the power-on of the gaming machine is 1000 or less), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table for determining, the puzzle production mode determination table A is selected (step 150IWS805).

If the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 1000 or less (that is, if the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol from the power-on of the gaming machine is more than 1000), the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. It is confirmed whether or not the set value is set to the set value "1" (step 150IWS806). If the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 90120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table B as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS807).

If it is not the set value "1", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "2" (step 150IWS808). If the set value is "2", the effect control CPU 90120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table C as the table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS809).

If the setting value is not "2" (that is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the setting value "3", the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table, the puzzle production mode determination table D is selected (step 150IWS810).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the puzzle effect mode determination table selected in steps 150IWS805, S807, S809, and S810 to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS811).

FIG. 68-27 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the puzzle production mode determination table. Of these, FIGS. 68-27 (A) show a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table A selected in step 150IWS805. Further, FIG. 68-27 (B) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table B selected in step 150IWS807. Further, FIGS. 68-27 (C) show a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table C selected in step 150IWS809. Further, FIG. 68-27 (D) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table D selected in step 150IWS810.

As shown in FIGS. 68-27, in each puzzle production mode determination table A to D, as the production mode (type) of the puzzle production, determination values are obtained for the puzzle production 1, the puzzle production 2, and the puzzle production 3, respectively. Is assigned. The puzzle effect 1 is a puzzle effect performed in such a manner that the number of pieces of the puzzle 1 is increased by one among the puzzles 1 to 3. Further, the puzzle effect 2 is a puzzle effect performed in such a manner that the number of pieces of the puzzle 2 is increased by one among the puzzles 1 to 3. Further, the puzzle effect 3 is a puzzle effect performed in such a manner that the pieces of the puzzle 3 are increased by one among the puzzles 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 68-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 3% higher than the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 is slightly increased until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times. Therefore, in this example, for example, even if the set value set is the setting value "1" having a low advantage, the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 having a high advantage is up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4 pieces). Is easier to get together.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68-27 (B), in the puzzle production mode determination table B, the determination ratio of the puzzle production 1 is 1% higher than the determination ratio of the other puzzle productions 2 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "1", the puzzle effect 1 is executed and the puzzle is executed. The rate at which one piece increases by one is slightly higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68-27 (C), in the puzzle effect mode determination table C, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 2 is 1% higher than the determination rate of the other puzzle effects 1 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "2", the puzzle effect 2 is executed and the puzzle is executed. The rate at which 2 pieces increase by 1 is slightly higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68-27 (D), in the puzzle production mode determination table D, the determination ratio of the puzzle production 3 is 1% higher than the determination ratio of the other puzzle productions 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed 1000 times, and when the set value is set to "3", the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the puzzle is executed. The rate at which 3 pieces are increased by 1 is slightly higher.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 68-27, in any of the puzzle production mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle productions 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3 as compared with the other puzzle productions. Since it is only% higher, it is easy to collect all the pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 to some extent, and it is a puzzle other than the puzzle that finally has the maximum number of pieces (5 pieces in this example) out of puzzles 1 to 3. However, at least 3 to 4 pieces are configured to be easy to align.

The method of constructing the puzzle production mode determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to determine the production mode of the puzzle production using different puzzle production mode determination tables according to the setting of the game clerk, and to change the selection ratio of the production mode of the puzzle production. You may. For example, depending on the setting, puzzles 1 to 3 may be arranged with pieces evenly to some extent, or a specific puzzle may be made easier to arrange pieces than other puzzles, or may be changed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 1 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS812). When the puzzle effect 1 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "1" (step 150IWS813). If the set value is "1", the process proceeds to step 150IWS815 as it is.

If the set value is not "1", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the first piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS814). If the value of the first piece counter is 4, the process does not shift to the processes of steps 150IWS815 to S818, but shifts to step 150IWS819. That is, in this case, the value of the first piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of puzzle 1 are gathered, and when puzzle production 1 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and puzzle 1 is formed. It will be completed, but the set value is not the setting value "1", and the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, so step 150IWS815 ~ It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S818.

When the set value is "1" (Y in step 150IWS813) or the value of the first piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS814), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 1 is executed. Puzzle effect 1 Set the execution flag (step 150 IWS815). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 1 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set, and the steps are taken according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S90172), the puzzle effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the first piece counter (step 150IWS816), and confirms whether or not the value of the first piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS817). If the value of the first piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS818).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS819). When the puzzle effect 2 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "2" (step 150IWS820). If the set value is "2", the process proceeds to step 150IWS822 as it is.

If the set value is not "2", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the second piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS821). If the value of the second piece counter is 4, the process does not shift to the processes of steps 150IWS822 to S825, but shifts to step 150IWS826. That is, in this case, the value of the second piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 2 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 2 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 2 is completed. It will be completed, but the set value is not the setting value "2", and the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, so step 150IWS822 ~ It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S825.

When the set value is "2" (Y in step 150IWS820) or the value of the second piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS821), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 2 is executed. Puzzle effect 2 Set the execution flag (step 150IWS82). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 2 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set, and the steps are taken according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S90172), the puzzle effect 2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the second piece counter (step 150IWS823), and confirms whether or not the value of the second piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS824). If the value of the second piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS825).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 3 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS826). When the puzzle effect 3 is determined, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122 is the set value "3" (step 150IWS827). If the set value is "3", the process proceeds to step 150IWS829 as it is.

If the set value is not "3", the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the value of the third piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS828). If the value of the third piece counter is 4, the process does not shift to the processes of steps 150IWS829 to S832, and the puzzle effect setting process ends. That is, in this case, the value of the third piece counter is 4, which means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 3 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 3 is executed, the fifth piece is aligned and the puzzle 3 is completed. It will be completed, but the set value is not the setting value "3", and the setting value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, so step 150IWS829 ~ It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S832.

When the set value is "3" (Y in step 150IWS827) or when the value of the third piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS828), the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the puzzle effect 3 is executed. Puzzle effect 3 Set the execution flag (step 150 IWS829). In this example, the process table including the puzzle effect 3 is selected based on the fact that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, and the steps are taken according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S90172), the puzzle effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be noted that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the third piece counter (step 150IWS830), and confirms whether or not the value of the third piece counter after the addition is 5 (step 150IWS831). If the value of the third piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS832).

In this example, the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set do not match due to the processing of steps 150IWS913, S814, S820, S821, S827, and S828. In the case of, a case is shown in which the puzzle effect is canceled to prevent such a situation from occurring, but the processing mode is not limited to that. For example, step 150IWS811 may be executed again to redetermine the effect mode of the puzzle effect until the effect mode of the puzzle effect that does not cause such a disagreement is determined. Further, for example, a table excluding the effect mode of the puzzle effect that causes such a disagreement may be used to redetermine the effect mode of the puzzle effect.

In addition, in this example, the case of controlling so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set does not match is shown, but only in such an aspect. Instead, it may be configured so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle and the set value actually set may not always match. For example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of completing the puzzle 3 is the highest, but the puzzle 1 or the puzzle 2 may be completed in some cases.

Also, for puzzle production, check whether the set value command reception flag is set (whether the set value command is received normally), and if the set value command is not received normally, the game Similar to the determination of the pre-suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution of the puzzle effect may be restricted.

(During big hit production decision processing)
FIG. 68-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. The big hit middle effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S90114). In the big hit middle effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS901). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122. Whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit, and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 150IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

In step S150IWS902, when the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the number shown in FIGS. 68-29 (A) is shown. One big hit suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 68-29 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table and the set value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode when the effect is executed. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the previous consecutive villa. It may be the time when the display is started, or it may be the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demo effect. Further, in this feature unit 150IW, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variation display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as a specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the 51st variation after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a jackpot suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different depending on the period from the display to the execution of the 100th variation display).

In the first and second jackpot suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 68-29 (A) and (B), the jackpot suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio to be calculated is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the setting value is set to be advantageous by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3" is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between them becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the jackpot suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a specific period, and it is possible to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the jackpot suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and may not be executed in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68-29 (A) and 68-29 (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, it is confirmed that the set value is "3" by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode.

In the feature unit 150IW, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 68-30 (A1), the decorative symbol that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed in the image display device 905. After that, as shown in FIG. 68-30 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 150IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed according to the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 68-30 (A1), after the decorative symbol to be a jackpot is stopped and displayed in the image display device 905, the figure is shown. As shown in 68-31 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 150IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to missing command or garbled data), the effect control The CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 150IWS903). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode A is set can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the selected jackpot suggestion effect determination table, assuming that the set value is "1". Step 150 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS903 to S904, the feature unit 150IW cannot normally receive the set value command, and when the effect mode A is set, the set value is the most disadvantageous setting. Assuming that it is "1", whether or not the suggestion effect is executed during the big hit and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 68-29 (A) and 68-29 (B), the ratio of the set value "1" determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and it is determined to be the fourth effect mode. There is no case. With such a configuration, even though an unfavorable setting value is set, the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode, and the player is disappointed. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is played and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not the effect mode C is set can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode using the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

FIG. 68-29 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIGS. 68-29 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the ratio of determining that the jackpot suggestion effect is to be executed is low, and the set values are “2” and “3”. Compared with the above, the ratio determined to be the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and it may not be determined to be the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS905 to S906, a disadvantageous setting value is set in the feature unit 150IW when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player, and to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the step 150IWS907 as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 150IWS905, in the case where the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set, the feature unit 150IW does not execute the suggestion effect during the big hit. Even though a disadvantageous setting value is set, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the player is disappointed, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing his interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the jackpot suggestion effect may be enabled to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the jackpot suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the jackpot suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 68-29 (A) and (B) is used. Therefore, it may be configured to determine the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 68-29 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The proportions may be different.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 68-29 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be different depending on the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 68-29 (B), the ratio of the jackpot suggestion effect not being executed is the same regardless of the set value, but the ratio of not being executed is different depending on the set value. You may let it.

Further, the feature unit 150IW is configured to execute a big hit middle suggestion effect as a setting suggestion effect when a big hit occurs in a specific period, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed) may be executed based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect reaches the predetermined number of times, or when a specific super reach effect or a advance notice effect is executed.

In this feature unit 150IW, it is possible to execute the jackpot suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value, but this is the jackpot suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third) according to the set value. The execution ratio of (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) is different, the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different depending on the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 150IWS907).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 68-30 (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 150IW101 is provided above the image display device 905. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68-30 (B2), the movable member 150IW101 is controlled to move to the front surface of the image display device 905.

As shown in FIGS. 68-30 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 905. The position where the dialogue image is displayed becomes difficult to see. In the feature unit 150IW, the suggestion effect during the jackpot and the bonus effect are executed at different timings of the fanfare period in the jackpot game, so that the movable member 150IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 905 is the jackpot. It does not obscure the dialogue image displayed by the medium suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 150IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 150IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 150IWS907, by using the character effect effect determination table shown in FIGS. 68-29 (D), the character effect effect is not executed when the jackpot suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and degrading the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even if the jackpot suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the jackpot suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize.

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (Performed during the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect, the operation mode of the movable member 150IW101 is changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialogue image by the jackpot suggestion effect), or the jackpot is hit. The display position of the dialogue image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit middle suggestion effect from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by reducing the execution ratio of the character effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 68-29 (D), and the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 150IWS909) when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 150IWS908).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 905, a light guide plate 150IW103 having translucency capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end face of the light guide plate are provided, and the light guide plate 150IW103 is provided. It is assumed that the light emitting body is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 150IW103 from the end surface of the light guide plate 150IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by making the light emitting body emit light, it is possible to execute the light guide plate effect of emitting light to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflection unit provided on the light guide plate 150IW103. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68-30 (B3), light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, resulting in a “big hit”. Character appears. Further, during the execution of the light guide plate effect, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 905.

In step 150IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIGS. 68-29 (E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the suggestion effect during the big hit and the effect mode when the effect is executed. To. Specifically, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When the effect is executed, the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed is low. That is, when the jackpot suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the jackpot suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to see. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 68-30 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 150IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the hobby of the game due to the suggestion effect during the big hit of the effect mode that is not desirable for the player. When the jackpot suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The production may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion production during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

Next, the production mode of the puzzle production will be described. 68-32 to 68-34 are explanatory views showing an example of an effect mode of the puzzle effect. As shown in FIGS. 68-32 (A), in the variable display of the decorative symbol for which the execution of the puzzle effect is not determined, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed on the image display device 905, and the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right is not displayed. The fluctuation display of is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 68-32 (B), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation time ends, and further, as shown in FIG. 68-32 (C), the fluctuation of the next decorative symbol is performed. It is assumed that the display has started. In the example shown in FIGS. 68-32 (C), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is determined when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect. Then, as shown in FIGS. 68-32 (C), for example, the puzzle effect effect screen (puzzle effect screen) 150IW106 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 905, and the puzzle effect is started.

FIG. 68-32 (D) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 shown in FIG. 68-32 (C). As shown in FIGS. 68-32 (D), the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are displayed on the puzzle effect screen 150IW106. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68-32 (D), one piece 150IW107-1 is already gathered in the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), and one piece is still gathered in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2). However, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) shows a case where two pieces have already been collected.

Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIGS. 68-33 (E), one new piece 150IW108-1 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 68-33 (F), the new piece 150IW108-1 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is increased by one. The production is executed. Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is erased, and the puzzle effect ends.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 68-33 (G), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is not determined in the next variable display of the decorative symbol, and as shown in FIG. 68-33 (G), the image display device. In 905, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right is displayed.

Then, after that, the puzzle effect is not executed, the variation display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIGS. 68-33 (H). It is assumed that it is in a state. In this example, during the customer waiting demonstration display, for example, the puzzle display display screen (puzzle display screen) 150IW110 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen of the image display device 905, as shown in FIGS. 68-33 (H). Then, the display of the puzzle display is started, and the current collection of pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are displayed.

After that, it is assumed that the game is started again, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed a plurality of times, and the puzzle effect is also executed a plurality of times. Then, when the variable display of a certain decorative pattern is started after that, it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect is decided and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect, and the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is displayed. It is assumed that the puzzle production has started. FIG. 68-34 (I) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIGS. 68-34 (I), the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) already has three pieces 150IW107-1 and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) already has four pieces. Therefore, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) shows a case where four pieces have already been collected.

Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIGS. 68-34 (J), one new piece 150IW108-5 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107 ( An effect is performed that encourages which of the puzzles 1) to 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. Then, as shown in FIG. 68-34 (K), the new piece 150IW108-5 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is increased by one. The production is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68-34 (K), since the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is completed with up to five pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), which is the maximum number, the image display device 905 is completed. In, a character display such as "Puzzle 2 completed!" Is displayed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 68-34 (L), a character "2" also appears in the completed puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the set value is the set value "2". Is suggested.

In the example shown in FIGS. 68-34 (L), the display of the number "2" directly suggests that the set value is "2". I can't be limited. For example, instead of such a direct expression, when the puzzle is completed, a picture corresponding to the setting value "2" (a picture reminiscent of the setting value "2") appears and is displayed. May be.

In addition, in FIGS. 68-32 to 68-34, the case where the puzzle 2 is completed and it is suggested that the set value is “2” is shown, but the set value “1” and the set value “3” are suggested. In this case, the puzzle effect is executed according to the same effect mode.

In the feature unit 150IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 905 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the jackpot suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, when a predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect having a specific effect mode) that can be executed at the same time as the jackpot suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the jackpot suggestion effect. You may give priority to the suggestion effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 905 by the predetermined effect is in a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the image displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect, it is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect. The image may be displayed preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 150IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern arranged on the surface. It may be applied (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum type gaming machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation (or characteristic) different from the normal time at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change. Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the ratio of execution may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the character effect effect and the light guide plate effect. Further, in this case as well, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesired suggestion is made to the player. For example, when an even initial number is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate. Further, the effect is not limited to the effect of the accessory and the effect of the light guide plate, and includes the control of outputting a predetermined sound, the control of vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and the control of emitting a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to others to reduce (or make it difficult to notice) the visibility of the initial roll effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect.

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 150IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at the time of turning on the power or the real-time clock) is executed in a specific mode. May suggest the setting.

In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting according to the number of times that the variable display is continuously executed without the hold storage becoming 0 or the number of times when a start winning prize exceeding the upper limit hold storage number occurs. Display control, output control of predetermined sound, light emission control of predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined) suggesting a setting based on the detection of an operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B during a predetermined operation valid period. (Controlling the light emission of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the feature portion 150IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, the feature portion 150IW illustrates a form in which the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 150IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side. May be good. Specifically, as a modification 1, as shown in FIGS. 68-35 (A) and 68-35 (B), a security cover 150IW500B composed of a short piece 150IW500Ba and a long piece 150IW500Bb is attached to, for example, a substrate case 150IW201. The right end of the long piece 150IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and the uncovering position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 150IW201, and is set via the through hole 150IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 150IW500Bb. The key 150IW051 may be operable. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the security cover 150IW500B (long piece 150IW500Bb) slides in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 150IW201 with the setting key 150IW051 covered. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is released by sliding the security cover 150IW500B to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. It can be changed from the regulated state to a state that can be released (it can be changed to a permissible state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 68-35 (A) and 68-35 (B), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the protruding dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the protruding dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is extended to the length L2 by sliding the security cover 150IW500B with respect to the board case 150IW201. (L2> L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 68-36 (A), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 150IW500B has a protrusion dimension from the substrate case 150IW201. By sliding the pachinko machine 1 to the board case 150IW201 until the length becomes L2 (the pachinko game machine 1 is allowed), the clerk of the game hall or the like operates the setting key 150IW051 to set the pachinko game machine 901. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIG. 68-36 (B), the security cover 150IW500B is attached to the board case 150IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 150IW201 becomes the length L1. On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not slid to move (unless the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500B will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 150IW500B covers the setting key 150IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end portion of the short piece 150IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 150IW001a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left-right direction is restricted. However, the security cover 150IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction as long as the state of covering the setting key 150IW051 is maintained by the security cover 150IW500B.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 68-37 (A) and 68-37 (B) as modification 2, the left end portion of the security cover 150IW500C is provided on the gaming machine. Between the covering position that covers the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and the uncovering position that is rotated from the covering position, centering on the vertical axis 150IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 150IW003. It may be rotatably supported by. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 150IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the long piece 150IW500Cb sets the setting key 150IW051 on the back side. The rotation from the covered state to the back side may be restricted.

Then, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 150IW051. It should be possible to operate it. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the pachinko gaming machine is restricted from rotating while the security cover 150IW500C (long piece 150IW500Cb) covers the setting key 150IW051. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in a plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state of covering the setting key 150IW051. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the regulated state (it can be changed to the allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68-38 (A), the security cover 150IW500C in the second modification is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (the pachinko gaming machine 901 is allowed), so that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by a clerk or the like operating the setting key 150IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state, as shown in FIGS. 68-38 (B), the security cover 150IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the setting key is set by the security cover 150IW500C. If the 150IW051 is not covered (unless the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500C will come into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. It has become.

Therefore, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in an allowable state. Therefore, the security cover 150IW500C covers the setting key 150IW051. It is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being forgotten, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, the feature portion 150IW exemplifies a mode in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is not limited thereto. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be changed by opening 150IW003a. When the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 150IW003a in this way, it is shown in FIGS. 68-39 (A) to 68-39 (C) as a modification 3. As described above, the through hole 150IW003b may be formed in the lower part of the gaming machine frame 150IW003 so that the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through port 150IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 9011 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the setting key 150IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 9011 opposite to the mounting surface. ..

When the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through port 150IW003b, a door body 150IW003c capable of opening and closing the through port 150IW003b is provided, and when the door body 150IW003c is closed, the setting key 150IW051 is used. The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 68-39 (B) and 68-39 (C), when the door body 150IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 150IW003a. Since the 150IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 150IW003a and the game machine frame 150IW003 so as to be openable and closable, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 150IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed. And can improve security.

As described above, the feature unit 150IW includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092 describes that the display control of an effect based on a set value is performed, and the process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when a special symbol changes, but it may be more periodic (at total variation, every predetermined variation, etc.) or irregularly (when winning by random number lottery, etc.). It is stated that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, the effect of the gaming machine is not necessarily the same as that of the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Cannot be increased. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
A process table including a puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606 in the effect control CPU 90120 to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a puzzle effect), and step 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S90172) are performed. With the part to execute)
The suggestion effect execution means is
When a display is performed in which a plurality of specific components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the specific suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), the setting value "1" is suggested), and it is possible to execute.
When a display is performed in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the special suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), it is possible to execute the production) that suggests the set value "3").
In the case of the setting value "1" as shown in FIG. 68-27 (B), the display is performed in which the specific component and the special component are gathered in different modes depending on the set value. In, the execution rate of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are a little easy to gather. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68-27 (D), when the set value is "3". Has a slightly higher execution rate of the puzzle production 3, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are a little easier to collect.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect of the effect is exhibited. Can be enhanced.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the first invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
A process table including a puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606 in the effect control CPU 90120 to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a puzzle effect), and step 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S90172) are performed. With the part to execute)
The suggestion effect execution means is
When a display is performed in which a plurality of specific components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the specific suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), the setting value "1" is suggested), and it is possible to execute.
When a display is performed in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) are gathered, the maximum number (for example, 5) of the special suggestion effect (for example, the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) is displayed as the suggestion effect. When the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is completed by collecting all the pieces up to (pieces), it is possible to execute the production) that suggests the set value "3").
A display is performed in which the specific component and the special component are gathered in different modes depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 68-27 (B), the setting value is "1". In, the execution rate of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are a little easy to gather. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68-27 (D), when the set value is "3". Has a slightly higher execution rate of the puzzle effect 3, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are a little easier to collect.),
Moreover,
It is possible to perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the effect of the effect is exhibited. Can be enhanced. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

In this example, a case where an image such as a puzzle piece is displayed as a specific component or a special component is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the sounds of various musical instruments may be output as specific components or special components, and the set values set by aligning the output sounds may be suggested.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 68-27, as a specific example of the aspect of "displaying that the specific component and the special component are gathered in different modes depending on the set value set". , The case where the puzzle pieces corresponding to the set values are configured so as to be easily gathered is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the set value, the puzzles may be gathered up to the maximum value (5 in this example) to make a difference whether or not the puzzle is completed, or the way the puzzle pieces are gathered halfway may be different. Various aspects can be considered, such as making the ease of obtaining pieces different.

Further, in this example, the case where the puzzle effect is executed and the puzzle pieces are gathered during the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform some kind of puzzle effect during the jackpot game to produce an effect in which puzzle pieces are gathered.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the specific suggestion effect when the set value is the specific set value (for example, the set value "1"), while the special suggestion effect cannot be executed (for example,). The effect control CPU 90120 can execute the puzzle effect 1 by executing steps 150IWS815 to S818 in the case of Y in step 150IWS813, but in the case of N in step 150IWS813 and Y in step 150IWS814, step 150IWS815. -Cancel the puzzle production without shifting to S818)
According to such a configuration, the effect is produced in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Can be enhanced.

In this example, when the setting value is "1", the puzzle 1 is not completed, and when the setting value is "2", the puzzle 2 is not completed. Although the case where the setting value is "3" is configured so that the puzzle 3 or the like is not completed, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the setting value "1" has a particularly low advantage, the puzzle 3 corresponding to the setting value "3" having a high advantage is restricted from being completed, and in other cases, the puzzle 3 is actually completed. It may be configured so that a puzzle other than the puzzle corresponding to the set value may be completed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
Whether or not the suggestion effect executing means displays to collect specific components or special components based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning the lottery process for the presence or absence of the puzzle effect in step 150IWS802). Direction (For example, as shown in FIGS. 68-33 (E) and 68-34 (J), one new piece flies and becomes either puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3). It is stated that it is possible to perform a rendition that incites whether a new puzzle fits in), and according to such a configuration, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in the game machine configured so that it can be set to the set value.

In this example, one new piece flies, and a case is shown in which an effect is performed to incite which of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, you can perform an effect that incites whether or not you can acquire pieces, or you can display multiple pieces and then perform an effect that incites which of those pieces you can acquire. Often, various aspects are conceivable.

Further, in this example, as a "predetermined condition", a lottery process is performed for each variable display, and a case where the predetermined condition is satisfied based on winning the lottery process is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the puzzle effect may be executed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the big hit, or the puzzle effect may be executed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the appearance of the predetermined advance notice effect. , Various aspects can be considered as predetermined conditions.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can display a collection of specific components and special components regardless of the set value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 68-27). In any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution rate of any of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3% higher than that of the other puzzle effects, so any of the puzzles 1 to 3. Pieces are also easy to gather to some extent)
According to such a configuration, the effect is produced in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means displays (for example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 shown in FIGS. 68-33 (H)) in which the states of the specific component and the special component in the process of being collected can be confirmed (for example, for effect control). The part that executes step 150 IWS518 in the CPU 120)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. That is, in this example, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by showing the state of the puzzle pieces in the middle of being collected. In particular, in this example, when the number of fluctuations is 1000 or less, puzzle pieces corresponding to the highly advantageous setting value "3" are likely to be collected, so that the setting is highly advantageous to the player. It can be expected that the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In this example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration display so that the acquisition status of each puzzle piece can be confirmed and the completed puzzle status can be confirmed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the acquisition status of the pieces of each puzzle and the status of the completed puzzle may be incorporated into the interface screen and displayed at all times so that the puzzles can be constantly confirmed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means displays that a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4) of special components corresponding to the high advantage are gathered even if the set value is a set value having a low advantage. (For example, as shown in FIG. 68-27 (A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination ratio of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 2 as compared with the determination ratios of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. It is 3% higher, and after turning on the power of the gaming machine, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the rate of increasing one piece of the puzzle 3 is slightly high).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120). (Part of executing 150IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 may be used. By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In this feature unit 150IW, for example, it is assumed that the RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is not backed up by the power supply, and the values of each piece counter are reset when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and the power supply is restarted. When it is thrown in, it is assumed that each puzzle is started in a reset state. It should be noted that at least a part of the RAM 90122 may be backed up to back up the value of each piece counter, or in this case, the piece counter stored in the RAM 90122 in response to the reset operation of the game clerk. It may be configured so that the value etc. can be reset.

Further, in the above case, for example, the gaming machine may be configured to start in a state where some pieces of some puzzles are gathered at the time of opening the gaming store. Further, in this case, the setting value may be suggested depending on which puzzle piece is activated in the gathered state. Further, there may be a pattern in which the gaming machine is activated when one of the puzzles is already completed when the gaming store is opened.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 7 of the first invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the first invention described above.

Further, the feature unit 150IW includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the set value storage means is cleared in the setting change process. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902, the gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 90122) that can store specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value, a process execution means (for example, step 150 IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 90100) for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by having (a part for executing S034 and S048) is described, and according to this feature, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set as one of the setting values. Processing can be preferably performed in a game machine configured to be configurable. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the second invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
An operating means (for example, a clear switch) provided for executing an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process, RAM clear 2 process) based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. )When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 90122) that can store specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value, a process execution means (for example, step 150 IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 90100) for executing the process by using the specific information a plurality of times. The part that executes S034 and S048)
Moreover,
It is possible to perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, processing is suitably performed in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. It can be performed. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, the RAM clear flag is confirmed, and the process is executed. It can be performed. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

In the special state after the end of the advantageous state, the set value may be suggested by the display mode of the remaining number of variable displays until the end of the special state. For example, the set value is advantageous for the player by selecting the display mode of the remaining number of times from a plurality of types by lottery or the like and making the selection ratio of each display mode different depending on the set value. The more the number is, the easier it is to display the remaining number of times according to a specific type of display mode. By doing so, the display mode of the remaining number of times is rich in variation, and the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value according to the appearance ratio of each display mode, so that the game entertainment can be improved.
Further, when displaying the remaining number of times in the special state, the setting value suggestion effect may be performed by the effect display device. For example, when displaying the remaining number of times in a special state, a character is displayed on the effect display device, and the character is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like for each execution of displaying the remaining number of times, and is set. By making the selection ratio of each character different depending on the value, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is to perform the effect by a specific type of character in the display of the remaining number of times. By doing so, if the display of the remaining number of times is executed, the set value suggestion effect will be performed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In this example, as a process to be executed "using specific information multiple times", a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 150IWS026 and S027 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS025. Control whether or not to execute the process of changing the set value of steps 150IWS035 to S042 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS034, or clear the RAM in step 150IWS048. Although the case where the recovery process of step 150IWS049 and S051 or the RAM clear 1 process is executed depending on whether or not the flag is set is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be possible to control whether or not the operation switch is enabled immediately before the operation of changing the set value according to whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change process (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
It is described that the operation means may be combined with the operation means, so that the increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used in combination as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 90102 and the operation means for performing the operation for changing the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost. can.

In this example, by using the clear switch in combination, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when the power is turned on to the game machine, so the clear switch must be turned on first when the power is turned on to the game machine. The RAM clear flag is set when it is detected, and after that, whether or not the clear switch for initializing the RAM 90102 has been operated is checked to see if the RAM clear flag is set, and the set value is set. The operation of the clear switch for the change operation can be appropriately performed by checking the state of the clear switch itself.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the game machine is started, the power supply to the game machine is started. A portion for executing steps 150 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 90100 to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A determination means (for example, a portion for executing step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 90100) capable of determining that the operation means has been operated based on the state of the operation means being switched from the off state to the on state is provided.
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is in step 150IWS041). When Y, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100). Executes step 150IWS037 when N in step 150IWS036)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S9021 to S9027 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can execute the timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs is provided.
The process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times from the start of the power supply to the gaming machine to the execution of the timer interrupt process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 has a game control microcomputer 90100. Step 150 IWS025, S034, S048 is executed)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 90120). (Part of executing 150IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 may be used. By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the second invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the second invention described above.

Further, the feature unit 150IW includes the third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be configurable to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546. .. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, the gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. (Part of executing steps 150IWS039 to S042 in 90100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determination means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 90100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is a step. When Y at 150IWS041, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 , When N in step 150IWS036, step 150IWS037 is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, processing is suitably performed in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the set value is unintentionally changed even though the operating means (clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, and the processing is appropriately performed. It can be carried out.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the third invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-60546.
A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player.
Operating means (for example, clear switch) and
A processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of executing a setting value change process for changing a set value based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the game machine is started. (Part of executing steps 150IWS039 to S042 in 90100) and
Based on the fact that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determination means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 90100) Prepare,
The process execution means can change the set value based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 is a step. When Y at 150IWS041, step 150IWS042 is executed),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 , When N in step 150IWS036, step 150IWS037 is executed),
Moreover,
It is possible to perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player.
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, processing is suitably performed in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the set value is unintentionally changed even though the operating means (clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, and the processing is appropriately performed. It can be carried out. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage means (for example, RAM 90122) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means was operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started is provided.
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times when executing a plurality of processes including the set value change process (for example, steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 90100). Part to do)
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
While the normal initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1 process) is executed based on the operation of the operating means when the power supply to the game machine is started, the power supply to the game machine is started. A portion for executing steps 150 IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 90100 to execute an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) based on the detection of an abnormality. )When,
A first storage area (for example, the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process, and the like.
A second storage area (for example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102) whose stored contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality is provided.
The specific information storage means can store specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 90102).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
The first state storage means (for example, the previous clear switch buffer) that stores the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the operation means this time is provided.
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the fact that the storage content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the storage content of the second state storage means is in the on state (). For example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS041).
The first state storage means stores an on state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 executes step 150IWS037).
It is described that such a configuration may be performed, and according to such a configuration, it is suitable for a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) that can specify which set value is set. Prepare,
The means of executing the suggestion effect is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, an in-game suggestion effect, a jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information input from the information output means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 90120). 150 IWS 510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 may be used. By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect according to the third effect mode, and the jackpot suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode are not executed.)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured so that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, the game is played. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the third invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the third invention described above.

Further, the present feature unit 150IW includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100). ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of fact, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a portion that executes steps 150IWS513, S707, S904).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fourth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100). ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As such, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a portion that executes steps 150 IWS513, S707, S904).
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a big hit suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 90120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122). Steps 150 IWS5111, S705, S902 are executed based on the set values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") (for example, the effect control CPU 90120). Executes steps 150IWS513, S707, S904 based on the set value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity.

In the feature unit 150IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestion effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestion effect. be.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 68-6 (A), (B), 68-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 68-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be provided with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the fourth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulatory member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 150IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 68-2, 68-3, 68-35 to 68-38).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 12 of the fourth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fourth invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is set to N, S708 in step 150IWS514. When N is N in N, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the fifth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is set to N, S708 in step 150IWS514. When N is N in N, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are not executed),
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a big hit suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time zone. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 68-6 (A), (B), 68-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 68-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be provided with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulatory member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 150IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 68-2, 68-3, 68-35 to 68-38).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 11 of the fifth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the fifth invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set setting value. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-20092, a fluctuation stop command (setting value specification command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the fluctuation stop command is transmitted. It is described that the display is performed by three types of production patterns corresponding to the three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, based on the value. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and the setting is made. In a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set. ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit middle suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the sixth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 90100) that can be set to any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") based on the setting operation. The part that executes 150IWS042) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion for executing steps S90114 to S90117 in the game control microcomputer 90100).
With an information output means that can output setting value information (for example, a setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set (for example, a part that executes steps 150IWS047 and S108 in the game control microcomputer 90100). ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, jackpot suggestion effect) based on the set value information output from the information output means. The CPU 90120 includes steps 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906).
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the in-game suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect by the fourth effect mode) and the second suggestion effect (for example, the game by the first effect mode). It is possible to perform pre-suggestion effects, in-game suggestion effects, and jackpot suggestion effects).
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestion effect cannot be executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example,). By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, S906, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, or the big hit middle suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode).
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set setting value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100 transmits a set value command at the time of turning on the power and at the start of fluctuation by executing steps 150IWS047 and S108. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the set value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means is the first suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect by the third effect mode, the suggestion effect during the game, and the big hit by the fourth effect mode) in which the set value is highly specified. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect according to the first effect mode, a during-game suggestion effect, and a big hit suggestion effect) in which the specified degree of the set value is low. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, the jackpot during the suggestion effect determination table), the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be determined. A suggestion effect determining means for determining (for example, a portion for executing steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 90120) is provided.
The suggestion effect determining means is
The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 90122). Steps 150 IWS5111, S705, S902 are executed based on the set values),
When the set value information is not input normally, the dedicated decision data (for example, the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table) is used. The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the jackpot suggestion effect determination table in step 150IWS515. , S709, S906)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means has at least a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at a different ratio depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is stated that it may be possible to execute (initial roll effect, etc.), and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 68-6 (A), (B), 68-23 (A), (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the hobby of the game.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-23 (A), (B), etc.).
It is described that a notification means capable of notifying information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is restricted. See FIG. 68-29 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be provided with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.), and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 12 of the sixth invention,
It is provided with an opening / closing body that can be opened / closed and a regulatory member (for example, security cover 150IW500A / security cover 150IW500B / security cover 150IW500C) that can regulate the operation of the operation unit.
When the opening / closing body is closed, the operation of the operation unit is restricted by the restricting member, and the restricted state is maintained. When the opening / closing body is opened, the restricted state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 150IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted, while the security cover 150IW500A is in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is open. The restricted state is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted. FIGS. 68-2, 68-3, 68-35 to 68-38).
It is stated that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 12 of the sixth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the sixth invention described above.

It should be noted that the feature unit 150IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when it is controlled to the effect mode A, if the set value information is not input normally, It is configured so that the suggestion effect can be executed as if it is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous for the player (the configuration of the fourth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode B, the set value. When the information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the configuration of the fifth invention described above), and when it is controlled to the effect mode C, the set value information is input normally. If this is not the case, the case where the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executably configured as the suggestion effect (the configuration of the sixth invention described above) is shown. Not limited. For example, it is possible to switch whether to execute the suggestion effect by any of the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention according to the gaming state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state and the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if the set value is set to a predetermined set value which is less advantageous to the player. Configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the gaming state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not input normally, the configuration is configured to limit the execution of the suggestion effect (the above-mentioned fifth invention). If the game state is a probable change state, if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (configuration). The configuration of the sixth invention described above) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention shown above, and to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by using only one of the control methods. May be good.

Further, in the present feature unit 150IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as omission or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the above 4th to 6th inventions (suggestion). Although the case (restricting the production) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting value command may be received, but the suggestion effect may be restricted when the received setting value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received by the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is received. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in the above and the set value stored in the previous time do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the above 4th to 6th inventions. It may be controlled (restricting the suggestion effect).

Further, the method of differentiating the games in each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of an odd-numbered setting value such as the set value "1" or "3", a series of villas (a continuous big hit occurs during a probable change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occur. It is configured so that the difference from the difficult time is large, and in the case of an even numbered setting value such as the setting value "2", the setting value is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive villas is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be feasible. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the fourth invention to the sixth invention. It may be configured to (restrict the suggestion effect).

Further, the control method for executing the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fourth to sixth inventions cannot be normally received can also be applied to the puzzle effect as the suggestion effect.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. And the game machine that is characterized by being able to execute the initial roll effect, etc.), according to this feature, the game is made to be interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time. It is possible to give motivation to play pachinko and enhance the interest of playing games.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the seventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) at least in a period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display at a different ratio depending on the set value. And initial roll production, etc.)
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to make an interest in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and to motivate the player to play the game from an early time zone. Can be enhanced. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of variablely displaying identification information for production (for example, a decorative pattern).
In the suggestion effect executing means, different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value in the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display (for example, the suggestion effect (for example). It is stated that the odd-numbered initial roll display) may be made feasible, and such a configuration can enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 68). -20 (A), as shown in (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests a set value after the variable display is started.
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the suggested set value than the suggestion effect, and according to such a configuration, the game entertainment can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the seventh invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the seventh invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the seventh invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 68-6 (A), (B), 68-23 (A), (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eighth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from after the setting change until the variation display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 68-6 (A), (B), 68-23 (A), (B)).
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIGS. 68-6 (A), (for example). B)),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 68-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times of execution of a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). It is possible to execute the suggestion effect based on (for example, that the advance notice effect has been executed) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed). See A) and (B))
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 5 of the eighth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eighth invention described above.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the ninth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092, there is a problem that the suggestive effect executed in the past cannot be confirmed and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-23 (A), (B), etc.).
A gaming machine is described that further comprises a notification means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517) capable of transmitting information regarding an executed suggestion effect. According to this feature. , It is possible to confirm the suggestion effects performed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the ninth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-23 (A), (B), etc.).
Further provided with a notification means capable of transmitting information regarding the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to confirm the suggestion effect executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestion effect is executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify information about the executed suggestion effect while waiting for a customer for which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that it may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
An information generation means for generating information (for example, execution history information) regarding the executed suggestion effect, and
An image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an image pickup device, and an image generation means.
It is described that the specific image may be provided with a display means (for example, an image display device 905) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image pickup device. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to 6 of the ninth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the ninth invention described above.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIG. 68-29. See (D)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the tenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize. Depending on the effect mode, the predetermined effect (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize) A predetermined effect execution means that can execute a light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Further provided with limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted). See D)),
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means changes at least one of the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is the ending). Change to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character effect is prohibited. See FIG. 68-29 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 150IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the usual one (for example, suggestion during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 905) include a display in one display means (for example, the image display device 905).
It is described that the above-mentioned one display means may display the display related to the suggestive effect with priority over the display related to the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the interest. Can be done.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 6 of the tenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the tenth invention described above.

The feature portion 150IW also includes the eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-20092 has a problem that the setting suggestion effect that is not preferable for the player may be executed, which may reduce the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect). A game machine that is characterized by having more difficult-to-use character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.) is described, and according to these features, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the eleventh invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
A game control means capable of executing control of the advantageous state based on a set value (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) and
It is equipped with a setting suggestion execution means that can execute a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value.
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set set value (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (A), (B), etc.).
When executed in parallel with the setting suggestion, the predetermined notification means capable of executing the predetermined notification in such a manner that the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is equipped with more difficult character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc.)
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a bonus effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 150IW101), and according to such a configuration. , The effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
A light guide plate having translucency capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 150IW103) and
It is provided with a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from the end surface of the light guide plate.
The light guide plate is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitting body and emits it to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the reflective portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. It is described that it is also good, and according to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and according to such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means includes the first setting suggestion (for example, the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode, see FIGS. 68-29 (A) and (B)), which suggests that the setting is set to the first set value. A second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, a jackpot suggestion effect of the third effect mode. FIG. 68-29 ( A), (see (B)) and can be executed,
When the first setting suggestion is executed, the predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate than when the second setting suggestion is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 68-29 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
It is equipped with a setting suggestion setting means that can set the execution ratio of the setting suggestion (for example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the operation means such as the push button 9031B and the operation means (management) such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine. It is possible to change the settings related to the setting suggestion effect by operating (only the person can operate).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that displays variable identification information.
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) to which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed.
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the set value is changed. According to such a configuration, the predetermined notification means may be executed. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 8 of the eleventh invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the eleventh invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the eleventh invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the twelfth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the twelfth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, the fanfare period during the jackpot game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5).
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when the second set value is set than when the first set value is set (for example, FIGS. 68-5 (A), (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set value may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means enables a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) to be executed regardless of a set value in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. It is described that it may be possible, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of a predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can control multiple types of advantageous states.
The game control means can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 68-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of the means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 10 of the twelfth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the twelfth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the twelfth invention described above.

The feature unit 150IW also includes the thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-20092, there is a problem that the gambling property may become too high at a setting having a high advantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention to solve the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value.
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value set (see, for example, FIG. 68-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Further, as a gaming machine of means A of the thirteenth invention, which solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a part where the CPU 90103 executes a setting change process) and
It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 53) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value.
The predetermined control period (eg, variable time) for the variable display varies depending on the set value set (see, eg, FIG. 68-7).
Moreover,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs a first variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol) and derives and displays a display result.
A second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b) that performs a second variable display (for example, variable display of the second special symbol) and derives and displays the display result, and
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, low probability / first KT state) until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Computer 560) and
In the special state, the remaining number display control means (for example, effect) capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends (for example, the first remaining number display 269F002 and the second remaining number display 269F003). Equipped with a control microcomputer 200)
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time (for example, S26A and S26B in FIG. 8).
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display (for example, in FIG. 48). As shown, in the low probability / 1st KT state, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as the background symbol).
The remaining number display control means displays the predetermined number of times before the start of the special state, and does not display the remaining number of times at the start of the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, a low probability. / The first remaining number display 269F002 is displayed before the start of the first KT state, and as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the low probability / the first remaining number display 269F002 is not displayed at the start of the first KT state), the above. The remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the special state, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E)). , The second remaining number display 269F003 is displayed when the variable display of 50 times has elapsed, and the second remaining number display 269F003 is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. Further, in a gaming machine in which the first variable display and the second variable display are executed at the same time, the remaining number of times can be appropriately displayed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 68-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may differ depending on the set value set, and such a configuration makes the gambling too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
It is a gaming machine that can play games using the gaming value.
A game value-giving means that gives game value based on the fulfillment of specific conditions,
In the setting means, the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the size of the game value given by the game value adding means are larger than the first set value as the size of the game value used for the game. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that occupies a high proportion.
The predetermined control period for the variable display is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 68-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is stated that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling becomes too high. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern, and
A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means is provided.
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to a set value (see, for example, FIG. 68-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium (for example, a gaming ball).
A game value-giving means (for example, CPU90103 is awarded) that gives game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a large winning opening). The part that executes sphere processing) and
It is provided with an information display means (for example, display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means.
The information display means can display a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base on the display monitor 150IW029).
It is described that the manufacturing cost may be increased, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
The gaming machines of the means 2 to the means 7 of the thirteenth invention, which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 of the thirteenth invention described above, can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means A of the thirteenth invention described above.

In the feature unit 150IW, the case where the set value can be set in three stages of the set value "1" to "3" is shown, but the setting is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more stages are set. It may be configured to be configurable to a value, or it may be configured to be configurable to a two-step setting value. In this case, for example, the setting value can be set to 6 levels, the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree for the big hit (reliability) when the setting value is "6". It may be configured to have the highest reliability).

Further, the configuration shown by the feature unit 150IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other feature units such as the feature unit 31AK to configure the gaming machine. For example, when executing the puzzle effect shown by the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect, the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect are executed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect, the title corresponding to the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect may be notified in the same manner as the feature unit 31AK. ..

1 ... Pachinko game machine 8a ... 1st special symbol display 8b ... 2nd special symbol display 9 ... Production display device 9a ... 1st variable display unit 9b ... 2nd variable display unit 9c ... Background symbol display unit 13 ... 1st Starting winning opening 13a ... 1st starting opening switch 14 ... 2nd starting winning opening 14a ... 2nd starting opening switch 15 ... Variable winning ball device 17 ... Acting gate 17a ... Acting gate switch 18c ... Symbol hold storage display 20 ... Special variable Winning ball device 22 ... Special variable winning ball device 23 ... Bottom member 24 ... Special winning opening 23a ... 1st count switch 25a ... 2nd count switch 31 ... Main board 32 ... Gate 55 ... RAM
56 ... CPU
80 ... Production control board 200 ... Production control microcomputer 201 ... Production control CPU
560 ... Microcomputer for game control 901 ... Pachinko game machine 902 ... Game board 903 ... Game machine frame 904A ... Special symbol display device (first special symbol display device)
904B ... Special symbol display device (second special symbol display device)
905 ... Image display device 906A ... Winning ball device 906B ... Variable winning ball device 907 ... Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R ... Speaker 909 ... Game effect lamp 9010 ... General winning opening 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9013 ... Voice Control board 9014 ... Lamp control board 9015 ... Relay board 9020 ... Ordinary symbol display 9021 ... Gate switch 9022A, 9022B ... Start switch 9023 ... Count switch 9030 ... Ball striking operation handle 9031A ... Stick controller 9031B ... Push button 9032 ... Movable body 90100 … Game control microcomputers 90101, 90121… ROM
90102, 90122 ... RAM
90103 ... CPU
90104, 90124 ... Random number circuit 90105, 90125 ... I / O
90120 ... CPU for production control
90123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
The first variable display means for performing the first variable display and deriving and displaying the display result,
A second variable display means that performs a second variable display and derives and displays the display result,
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling the special state until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed,
In the special state, a remaining number display control means capable of controlling the display of the remaining number of variable displays until the special state ends, and
A first holding storage means for storing information related to the first variable display that has not been started as the first holding storage information is provided.
The first variable display means and the second variable display means can be variably displayed at the same time.
At least in the special state, the variable display of at least one of the first variable display and the second variable display is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the other variable display.
The remaining number display control means
The predetermined number of times is displayed before the start of the special state, the remaining number of times is not displayed when the special state is started, and the remaining number of times is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the special state. At the same time, the display of the remaining number of times is updated every time the subsequent variable display is started.
The remaining number of times is displayed when the variable display after the lapse of the predetermined period is started, the display of the remaining number of times is temporarily erased during the execution of the variable display, and the remaining number of times is displayed again after the variable display is completed. And display
In both the first variable display and the second variable display, the display of the remaining number of times is updated.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined period is a period longer than the total period of the execution periods of the first variable display as the first reserved storage information stored in the first reserved storage means.

Images